AlfaWiki.nl

AlfaWikiDear Client,Thank you for choosing Alfa Romeo.
Your Alfa 156 GTA has been designed to guarantee the safety, comfort and driving pleasure typical of Alfa Romeo.
This booklet will help you to get to know the characteristics and operation of your car.
The following pages contain all the indications necessary for you to be able to maintain the high standards of performance, quality, safety andrespect for the environment which characterize this Alfa 156 GTA.
The Warranty Booklet also contains the regulations, the warranty certificate and a guide to the services offered by Alfa Romeo.
Services which are essential and precious because, when you purchase an Alfa Romeo you are not only acquiring a car, but the tranquillity thatcomes from knowing that an efficient, willing and widespread organization is at your service for any assistance problems you may have.
What's more every single component of the Alfa 156 GTA is fully recyclable. At the end of your car’s useful lifespan any Alfa Romeo
dealer would be pleased to make arrangements for you car to be recycled (in compliance with current regulations in force).
Nature benefits in two ways: there’s no pollution from waste disposal, and the demand for raw materials is reduced.
Have a good trip.

This booklet describes all the versions of the Alfa 156 GTA, so you should only consider the information concerning the trim level, engine and version purchased by you.

1

AlfaWiki.nl

AlfaWiki

MUST BE READ!
REFUELLING

K

Only refuel with unleaded petrol with octane rating (RON) not less than 95.

STARTING THE ENGINEEngines with mechanical transmission: make sure the handbrake is pulled; put the gear lever into neutral; press the
clutch pedal down to the floor without touching the accelerator, then turn the ignition key to AVV and release it as soon as
the engine starts.
Engines with Selespeed transmission: keep the brake pedal fully depressed; turn the ignition key to AVV and release it as soon as the engine has started; the transmission sets to neutral automatically (the display shows position N).
PARKING OVER FLAMMABLE MATERIALWhile functioning normally, the catalytic converter reaches high temperatures. For this reason do not park the car over inflammable material, grass, dry leaves, pine needles, etc.: fire hazard.

PROTECTING THE ENVIRONMENTU

A system for continuously monitoring emission system components to ensure greater environmental protection is fitted inyour car.

2

AlfaWiki.nl

AlfaWiki

ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES쇵

If, after buying the car, you decide to add electrical accessories (that will gradually drain the battery), contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the car’s electric system can support therequired load.

CODE CARD
Keep the code card in a safe place, not in the car. You should always keep the electronic code written on the CODE card withyou in case you need to carry out an emergency start-up procedure.

PROGRAMMED MAINTENANCE
Correct maintenance of the car is essential for ensuring it stays in tip-top condition and safeguards its safety features, its environmental friendliness and low running costs for a long time to come.

THE OWNER’S MANUAL CONTAINS…
…information, tips and important warnings regarding the safe, correct driving of your car, and its maintenance. Pay particular attention to the symbols " (personal safety) # (environmental protection) â (car well-being).

3

AlfaWiki.nl

AlfaWikiAny queries concerning servicing should be forwarded to the showroom from which the vehicle was purchased, the subsidiary company or to
our branch offices or associated companies.
Warranty Booklet
The Warranty Booklet is delivered together with every new vehicle and contains the regulations tied to the services given by Alfa Romeo Services and to the warranty conditions.
Correctly carrying out the scheduled services specified by the manufacturer is the best way to maintain the performance, safety characteristics
and low running costs of your vehicle. It is also necessary to maintain warranty cover.
“Service“ guideThis contains the Alfa Romeo Authorized Services. The services can be recognized by the presence of the Alfa Romeo badge and logo.
The Alfa Romeo organization in Italy can be found in the telephone book under the letter “A“ Alfa Romeo.
Not all the models described in this booklet are available in all countries. Only some of the fittings described in this booklet are fitted as standard to the vehicle. The list of available accessories should be requested from the Alfa Romeo Dealers.

4

AlfaWiki.nl

AlfaWikiTHE SYMBOLS USED IN THIS BOOKLET
The symbols illustrated in these pages show the subjects which should,
in particular, be closely studied.

PERSONAL
SAFETY

Warning: partially or
fully ignoring these rules may leadto serious injury.

PROTECTING THE
ENVIRONMENTThis indicates the correct procedures
to be followed to preventthe vehicle from damaging theenvironment.

VEHICLESAFETY

Warning: partially or fully ignoring theserules may lead to serious damage
being caused to the vehicle which, in somecircumstances, may cause forfeiture of thewarranty cover.

The texts, illustrations and specifications given in this booklet refer to the vehicle
at the time of going to press.
As part of our ongoing striving to improve our products, Alfa Romeo may introduce technical changes during production, therefore
the specifications and fittings may be altered without prior notice.
For details on this subject, please apply to the manufacturer’s sales network.

5

AlfaWiki.nl

AlfaWiki

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
SYMBOLS
Special coloured labels have been attachednear to or actually on some of the components making up your Alfa 156 GTA.
These labels bear symbols that remind youof the precautions to be taken as regards
that particular component.

ALFA ROMEO
CODE SYSTEM
To increase protection against attempted
theft, the car is fitted with an electronic engine lock system (Alfa Romeo CODE) whichis activated automatically when the ignition
key is removed. In fact the grip of each key
contains an electronic device which modulates
the radio frequency signal transmitted whenthe engine is started by a special aerial incorporated in the ignition switch. This modulated signal is the “password“ by which thecontrol unit recognises the key and only inthis condition can the engine be started.

THE KEYS
The car is delivered with two keys, key(A-fig.1) with metal insert and remotecontrol function and another key with metal insert only, without remote control.
The key remote control operates:– door centralised opening/locking– opening luggage compartment boot/tailgate– activation/deactivation of electronic
alarm (if existing)

A0B0016m

6

fig. 1

AlfaWiki.nl

AlfaWiki– the ignition switch– the driver's door lock and, optional forversions/markets where applicable, the passenger's door lock– glove box lock
– passenger’s side Air bag deactivation.
IMPORTANT In order to ensure perfect
efficiency of the electronic devices contained
inside the keys, they should never be directly
exposed to the rays of the sun.

The CODE card (fig. 2) is also suppliedwith the key and it contains the codes of thekeys (both the mechanical one and the electronic one for emergency starting).
The code numbers on the CODE card must
be kept in a safe place, not in the car.
The driver should always keep the electronic code given on the CODE card with him
in the event of having to carry out emergency starting.

KEY WITH REMOTE CONTROLThe key is fitted with (fig. 3):– a metal insert (A) that can be enclosed
in the key grip
– button (B) for remote opening/closing of the doors and turning the electronic
alarm on/off (where fitted)– a button (C) for remote boot unlocking– removable hook ring (D)– a button (E) for power-assisted openingof the metal insert.

If the car changes owner,
the new owner must be
given all the keys and theCODE card.

A0B0010m

fig. 2

AlfaWiki

A0B9000m

fig. 3

AlfaWiki.nl

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Key metal insert operates:

7

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

The metallic insert (A) of the key operates:– the ignition switch– the driver's door lock and, optional forversions/markets where applicable, the passenger's door lock– the glovebox lock
– passenger’s Air bag deactivation.
To move the metallic insert out of the key
grip, press button (E).

To insert the metallic insert in the key grip,press the button (E-fig. 3) to release theinsert and turn it in the direction of the arrow until it clicks.
To open/close the doors by remote control, press button (B). On cars fitted withelectronic alarm system, pressing button (B)also turns the electronic alarm .
IMPORTANT Certain radio devices outside the car (e.g. mobile phones, HAM radio systems) could disturb the remote control frequency. In this case the remote control
could malfunction.

WARNING
When button (E) ispressed, take the utmost
care to prevent the metal insert
from causing injury or damage
when it comes out. Button (E) must
only be pressed when the key isaway from the body, in particular
the eyes, and from objects that
could be spoilt (e.g. clothes). Never leave the key unattended to prevent anyone, especially children,from holding it and pressing button(E) inadvertently.

8

AlfaWiki.nl

AlfaWiki

OPENING THE BOOT
The boot can be opened by remote control
from outside pressing button (C-fig. 3),
also when the electronic alarm is on.
In this case the alarm system switches off
the boot volumetric protection and control
sensor, the system gives two “beeps“ (withthe exceptions of versions for certain markets) and the direction indicators light up forabout three seconds.
Closing the boot again, the control functions are restored, the system gives two“beeps“ (with the exceptions of versions forcertain markets) and the direction indicators
light up for about three seconds.

Each time the ignition key is turned to
STOP position, the Alfa Romeo CODE system deactivates the functions of the engine
electronic control unit.
Each time the engine is started, turning the
key to the MAR, position, the control unitof the Alfa Romeo CODE system sends arecognition code to the engine control unit
to deactivate the inhibition of the functions.
The recognition code, which is crypted andvariable between over 4 billion combinations, is only sent if the system control unit
has recognised the code sent to it by thekey, which contains an electronic transmitter, through an aerial in the ignition switch.

A0B0021m

This condition is indicated by a brief flashof the warning light (A) on the check panel.
If the code has not been recognised correctly, the warning light (A) stays on together with the warning light (B).
In this case, you are recommended to return the key to the STOP position and thenback to MAR; if the inhibition persists, try
again possibly with the other key provided
with the car. If it is still impossible to start
the car carry out the emergency starting procedure described in section “In an emergency“ and turn to an Alfa Romeo Authorized Service.
IMPORTANT Every electronic key has
its own code, which must be memorisedby the system control unit. To memorise newkeys, up to a maximum of eight, apply solely to Alfa Romeo Authorized Services taking
with you all the keys in your possession, theCODE card, a personal identity document
and the car’s possession documents.

IMPORTANT The Alfa Romeo CODE(¢) warning light comes on when travelling with the ignition key on MAR:
1) If the warning lamp lights up while thecar is moving, it means that the system isrunning a self-diagnosis (e.g. due to a voltage drop). The first time you stop you cantest the system as follows: switch the engine off by turning the ignition key to
STOP; then turn the key back to MAR:the warning lamp will light up and should
go out in the space of about one second. If
the warning lamp fails to go out, leave the
key at STOP for more than 30 seconds andrepeat the procedure described previously.
If the problem persists, contact your Alfa
Romeo Authorized Service.

9

fig. 4

AlfaWiki.nl

AlfaWiki

The codes of the keys notprovided during the newmemorising procedure are
erased from the memory. This is toensure that any lost or stolen keys
can no longer be used to start thecar.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

OPERATION (fig. 4)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

2) If the warning lamp flashes it meansthat the car is not protected by the immobiliser. Contact your Alfa Romeo Authorized
Service immediately and get them to store
the codes of all the keys in the memory.

If after 2 seconds withthe key in the MAR position, the warning light turnon again flashing, this means thatthe code of the keys has not been
memorised, thus the car is not protected by the Alfa Romeo CODE
system against attempted theft. In
this case, contact an Alfa Romeo
Authorized Service to have the key
codes memorised.

CHANGING THE
BATTERY OF THE KEY
WITH REMOTE CONTROL
If when pressing button (B or C-fig. 5)
the control is rejected or is not performed,
the battery should be replaced by a new oneof the same type to be found c/o normal
retailers. On versions fitted with electronic
alarm, the need to replace the remote control battery is indicated by the coming on,
with fixed light, of the deterrent led (A-fig.
6) set on the dashboard near the central air
vent.

IMPORTANT The system is protectedby a 10A fuse housed in the fuse-holder set
under the dashboard (see paragraph “If afuse blows“ in “In an emergency“ chapter).

10

A0B9000m

fig. 5

A0B0011m

fig. 6

AlfaWiki.nl

AlfaWiki

Dead batteries are harmful for the environment.
They must be disposed ofin special containers as specified bycurrent regulations. Avoid exposure to naked flames and high temperatures. Keep out of reach ofchildren.

A0B0047m

ELECTRONIC ALARM

REMOTE CONTROL (fig. 8)

DESCRIPTION

The remote control is built into the key and
it is fitted with a button for activating thealarm (B-fig. 8).

The system comprises: transmitter, receiver, control unit with siren and volumetric sensors and anti-lift sensor. The electronic
alarm is controlled by a receiver inside the
car and it is turned on and off through theremote control incorporated in the key which
sends the crypted and variable code. The
electronic alarm monitors: unlawful openingof the doors, bonnet and boot (perimetral
protection), operation of the ignition key,battery and emergency key cable cutting,the presence of moving bodies (volumetricprotection), any abnormal raising/slopingof the car and operates the central door locking system. It also makes it possible to cut
off the volumetric protection.
IMPORTANT The engine inhibitor function is guaranteed by the Alfa Romeo CODE
system which is activated automaticallywhen the ignition key is removed.

fig. 7

AlfaWiki

A0B9000m

fig. 8

AlfaWiki.nl

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

To change the battery (fig. 7):– move the metal insert (A) to the unlocking position;– turn the pin (B), taking the referencemark (dot) of the cut to the UNLOCK position (2);– working on the notch (C) remove thebattery holder (D);– change the battery (E) putting it in theposition shown on the holder;– insert the holder back in the key andlock it, turning the reference mark of the pin(B) to the LOCK position (1).

11

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

REQUEST FOR ADDITIONAL
KEYS WITHREMOTE CONTROLThe receiver can recognise up to 5 keys
with remote control. If during the life of the
car a new key with remote control is needed for any reason whatsoever, contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services directly, taking
with you the CODE card, a personal identity document and the car’s possession documents.

ACTIVATING THE ALARM

Surveillance

When the doors and boot/bonnet lids areclosed and the ignition key is in the STOP
or PARK position (key removed), point the
remote control towards the car and thenpress and release the button (B-fig. 8).

When the system has been turned on, theled (A-fig. 9) on the dashboard will flash
to indicate that the system is in the surveillance mode. The led will flash continuously
while the system is under surveillance.

With the exception of some markets thesystem sounds a beep and the door lock is
engaged.

IMPORTANT Operation of the electronic
alarm is adapted at the origin to the regulations of the different countries.

Engagement of the alarm is preceded bya self-diagnosis phase characterised by achange in the frequency at which the deterrent led (A-fig. 9) on the dashboard
flashes. If an anomaly is detected the system gives off a further beep.

Self-diagnosis and monitoringof doors and bonnet/bootIf, after the alarm has been activated, asecond acoustic signal is heard, check that
all the doors and bonnet/boot are closed
properly and engage the system once again.
On the other if a door or bonnet/boot lid
is not correctly closed it will not be controlled
by the system.

A0B0011m

12

fig. 9

AlfaWiki.nl

AlfaWiki

If the control signal is repeated when the
doors and bonnet/boot are closed properly this means that the self-diagnosis function
has detected a system operating fault, inwhich case it is necessary to contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services.

To deactivate the alarm, press the buttonon the key with remote control. The system
performs the following (with the exceptionof some markets):– the direction indicators turn on twice
briefly– two beeps are sounded briefly by thesiren– the doors are released.
IMPORTANT If the led (A-fig. 9) inthe car stays on when the system has been
deactivated, (maximum of 2 minutes or until the ignition key is moved to MAR) the
following should be borne in mind:– if the led stays on permanently, it meansthat the remote control batteries are flat andneed replacing;– if the led continues to flash, but at different intervals than normal, it means that
attempts to steal the car have been made,counting the number of flashes it is also possible to identify the type of attempt:
1 flash:right front door

2 flashes:left front door

3 flashes:right rear door

4 flashes:left rear door

5 flashes:volumetric sensors

6 flashes:bonnet7 flashes:boot

8 flashes:

tampering with car starting
cables

9 flashes:

tampering with battery or
cutting emergency key cables

10 flashes:at least three causes ofalarm.

AUTOMATIC ENGAGEMENT
OF THE ALARM(optional for versions/markets
where applicable)
If the alarm has not been engaged withthe remote control it will come on automatically after an established time of 30
seconds from the moment that the ignition
key has been turned to the STOP or
PARK positions and a door or the boot has
been opened and then closed again. Thiscondition is shown by the intermittent illumination of the led in the car and by the signalling described previously.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

DEACTIVATING THE ALARM

To deactivate the alarm press the buttonon the remote control.
The alarm is also automatically engaged
when the doors are closed using the key.
When the alarm is engaged automatically the doors are not locked.

13

AlfaWiki.nl

AlfaWiki

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

WHEN THE ALARM
IS TRIGGERED
When the alarm is engaged it will soundwhen:– one of the doors, the bonnet or the tailgate is opened;– the battery is disconnected or the electric cables are cut, or the emergency key cables are cut;– intrusion into the passenger compartment, e.g. window being broken (volumetricprotection);– attempt to start the engine (key atMAR);– abnormal car raising/sloping.

INTERRUPTING THE ALARM

VOLUMETRIC PROTECTION

To interrupt the alarm press the button on
the remote control or, if the remote control
battery is down, get into the car, insert the
key into the ignition switch and turn the key
to MAR.

To guarantee correct operation all the windows and the sunroof, if any, should beclosed.

IMPORTANT If it is necessary for thevehicle to lie inactive for long periods (over3 weeks), close the vehicle using the key
to deactivate the alarm.

The led in the car will come on for about
2 seconds to confirm that the function has
been excluded.

Depending on the markets, the triggeringof the alarm will activate the siren and thehazard warning lights (for about 26 seconds). The methods of operation and thenumber of cycles may vary depending on
the versions/markets.

To restore volumetric protection move theignition key to the MAR position and holdit in this position for more than 30 seconds.
If requiring to activate an electric control
operated by the ignition key at MAR (e.g.
electric windows) with the volumetric protection deactivated, turn the ignition key
to MAR, operate the control and return the
key to STOP within a maximum time of
30 seconds. This way volumetric protection
is not restored.

However a maximum number of cycles isforeseen.
Once the alarm cycle has come to an end,
the system will return to its normal monitoring state.

14

AlfaWiki.nl

AlfaWikiThis function can be excluded (for example when leaving animals on-board the car)by performing the following operations inquick succession: when the key is at MAR,
move the key to the STOP position andthen return the key to MAR and then once
again to the STOP position. Remove theignition key.

When requiring to dispense with the siren
acoustic signalling in the alarm condition, simply keep the remote control button (Bfig. 10) pressed for 4 seconds when engaging the system.
This condition is shown by a series of 5
beeps in quick succession after the normal
acoustic/visual signals when the system isoperated.
The next time the system is activated, normal operation of the siren is restored automatically.

MINISTERIALHOMOLOGATIONREMOTE CONTROLDOOR LOCKING SYSTEM

In keeping with the laws in force in eachcountry on the subject of radio frequency,
we point out that:

The system comprises a receiver inside the
car and a transmitter (remote control) incorporated in the key.

– the separate homologation numbers foreach market are given on the last pages ofthis handbook before the alphabetical index(for some countries also homologation document);

To lock/unlock the locks, point the transmitter towards the car, press and release
the button (B-fig. 11).

– for markets in which the transmitter
needs to be marked with the homologation
number, this has been stated on the component.

IMPORTANT Should it be necessary toprogramme additional remote controls, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

(Depending on the versions/markets, thecode may also be marked on the transmitter and/or on the receiver).

A0B9000m

A0B9000m

fig. 10

fig. 11

AlfaWiki.nl

AlfaWiki

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

CUTTING OUT OPERATION
OF THE SIREN(for versions/markets
where applicable)

15

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

IGNITION DEVICE– AVV: unstable position for starting theengine.

THE SWITCH (fig. 12)

IMPORTANT If the engine does notstart, return the ignition key to the STOP
position and repeat the sequence.

The key can be moved to one of four positions:– STOP: engine switched off, key can beremoved, engine lock engaged, steering lockengaged, all services excluded apart fromthose powered directly (e.g. hazard warning lights).
– MAR: drive position. The engine lockis deactivated and all electrical devices are
powered.
IMPORTANT Never leave the key in thisposition when the engine is stationary.

A0B0020m

16

The ignition block is fitted with a safety device preventing it from being moved to the
AVV position when the engine is alreadyrunning.
– PARK: engine switched off, key canbe removed, engine lock engaged, steering lock engaged, sidelights automaticallyswitched on.
IMPORTANT To turn the key to the
PARK position, button (A) located on theswitch should be pressed first.

STEERING LOCKEngaging lock:– move the ignition key to the STOP or
PARK position and remove the key lightly turning the steering wheel to facilitate thelocking action.
Releasing the lock:

WARNING
When leaving the car always remove the key fromthe ignition to prevent any passenger in the car from inadvertently activating the controls. Never leave children unattended in thecar. Remember to engage the handbrake and if the car is facing uphill,
first gear and if the car is facing
downhill, reverse.

fig. 12

AlfaWiki.nl

AlfaWiki

If the ignition device istampered with (for example during an attempted
break-in) have it checked over by
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services,
before travelling again.

– turn the key to the MAR position andgently rock the steering wheel.

DOORS

Rear doors

WARNING
Before opening a door,
ensure that this can bedone safely.

– To open the door, only with the innerknob (A-fig. 14) raised, pull the opening handle (A-fig. 15).
– To close, press the button (A-fig. 14)
also with the door open, then close the door.

OPENING/CLOSINGFROM OUTSIDEWARNING
It is absolutely forbidden
to carry out whatever after-market operation involving
steering system or steering column
modifications (e.g.: installation ofanti-theft device) that could badly
affect performance and safety, cause the lapse of warranty and also
result in non-compliance of the carwith homologation requirements.

Front doors– To open the driver's door turn the key
clockwise and to open the passengers' door,
optional for versions/markets where applicable, turn the key anti-clockwise, thenremove the key and press the button (Afig. 13).
– To close the door, turn the key in the opposite direction.
A0B0023m

fig. 13

A0B0369m

fig. 14

AlfaWiki.nl

AlfaWiki

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNING
Never remove the key
with the car on the move.
The steering wheel would lock automatically the first time the steering wheel is turned. This also occurs if the car is towed.

17

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

OPENING/CLOSINGFROM INSIDE

Rear doors

CENTRALIZED LOCKING

Front doors

WARNINGThe rear doors can only
be opened if the child safety lock has been released.

This permits centralized locking of all
doors, both front and rear.

– To open the door pull the handle (Afig. 16) regardless of the position of knob
(B).
– To close the door pull the flap. To prevent the door from being opened from outside press knob (B).

– To open the door pull handle (Afig. 17).
– To close the door press the knob (B)even when the flap is open, and then close
the flap.

To operate the centralized locking device
the doors must be perfectly closed otherwise
the system will not work.
For versions/markets, where applicable,
central locking depends on the complete
closing of all the doors and of the boot.
– From outside: when the doors areclosed, insert and turn the key in the lock of
one of the two front doors.

Incorrect closing of one or more doors willturn on the symbol ´ together with the relevant message on the Infocenter display.

A0B0025m

18

fig. 15

A0B0024m

fig. 16

fig. 17

AlfaWiki.nl

AlfaWiki

A0B0026m

By pressing the knob (B-fig. 17) on oneof the rear doors only that particular door
will be locked.
IMPORTANT For the front doors it is notpossible to keep the knob (B-fig. 16)
down if the door has not been shut properly.
IMPORTANT The centralized locking
system can be deactivated, thus unlocking
all doors, by lifting the door opening leveron one of the two front doors. If the power
supply is interrupted (burnt fuse, battery disconnected, etc.) each door can be opened
manually from both inside and outside thecar.

CHILD SAFETY LOCKThe rear doors are equipped with a special
device (fig. 18) which prevents the door
being opened from inside.

WARNING
Always use this device
when carrying children.

IMPORTANT Each device only acts on
the door on which it is installed.
The device can only be engaged with thedoors open, raising or lowering the control
with the ignition key:
position 1 (control up) – device engaged (door locked);position 2 (control down) – device released (door can be opened from inside).

IMPORTANT The intervention of the inertial fuel cut-off switch causes the automaticdoor unlock and inhibits door locking forabout 30 seconds. After this time, door locking control unit operation is restored.

WARNING
After activating the safety device check that it isworking correctly by pulling on the
inner lever used to open the door.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR– From inside: when the doors areclosed, press one of the knobs (B-fig. 16)
located on the front doors, engage/release
the centralized locking system.

A0B0027m

fig. 18

19

AlfaWiki.nl

AlfaWiki

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARFRONT SEATSWARNING
Adjustments may bemade solely with the car
stationary.

MOVING THE SEATSBACKWARDS OR FORWARDS

ADJUSTING THE HEIGHTOF THE DRIVER’S SEAT

Lift lever (A) and push the seat backwards
or forwards: in the driving position the arms
should be slightly flexed and hands should
rest on the rim of the steering wheel.

To raise the seat, pull the lever (B) taking it upwards, then continue operating thelever (up and down) until reaching the required height, then release the lever. To lower the seat, push the lever (B) downwards,
then operate the lever (up and down) until
reaching the height required.

Fig. 19: sporty seats and lateral air bags.

IMPORTANT Adjustment must only be
carried out when seated in the driver’s seat.

A0B0406m

WARNING
Once you have let go off
the lever, check that theseat is firmly locked in the runnersby trying to move it back andforth. If the seat is not locked properly, in the case of collision it might
move unexpectedly with clearly
dangerous consequences.

ADJUSTING THE ANGLE
OF THE BACKREST
Adjustment is of the electric type; use button (D) on the outer side of the seat to set
the backrest in the required position.
LUMBAR ADJUSTMENT
OF THE DRIVER’S SEAT
(optional for versions/markets
where applicable)
Adjustment is done by turning the knob(E) until reaching the most comfortable position.

20

fig. 19

AlfaWiki.nl

AlfaWiki

The seat warming pad can be switched on
and off using switch (F) on the outer sideof the seat.
When the function is “on” the led on key(F) and the pilot lamp (G) are lit.

REAR SEATSKI COMPARTMENT(optional for versions/markets
where applicable)

CENTRE ARMREST(fig. 22)

This compartment can be used for carrying long loads.

To use the centre armrest, lower it holding
the grip (A) as illustrated.

To gain access to this compartment, lower the armrest, pull the grip (A-fig. 23)of the lid and lower it onto the armrest (fig.
24).

REAR POCKETS (fig. 21)
The front seats are provided with a pocket in the rear of the seat back.

A0B0311m

fig. 21

fig. 23

A0B0405m

fig. 20

A0B0313m

fig. 22

A0B0453m

fig. 24

AlfaWiki.nl

AlfaWiki

A0B0321m

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

SEAT WARMING (fig. 20)

21

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

The compartment can be extended by removing the armrest: with the armrest lowered, press the two small handles (Bfig. 25) at the base of the armrest inwards
and remove it. Then pull the grip of the lid
and lower it onto the rear seat (fig. 26).

HEADRESTThe car is fitted with two headrests for theside seats.
If necessary the headrests can be removed
as follows:– raise the headrest to the maximum
height;– press both buttons (A and B-fig. 27)
and remove the headrests.

A0B00323m

STEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENT
The steering wheel position is adjustable
and may be move nearer to or further awayfrom the driver and also raised or lowered.
To do this, it is necessary to release lever(A-fig. 28) and pull it towards the steering wheel.
After setting the steering wheel in the mostappropriate position, lock it pushing the lever
fully home.

fig. 25
A0B0324m

22

fig. 26

A0B0296m

fig. 27

fig. 28

AlfaWiki.nl

AlfaWiki

A0B0035m

ADJUSTING THE
REAR-VIEW MIRRORSElectrically adjustable (fig. 30)– Select the mirror to be adjusted (rightor left) using switch (A):

INTERNAL
REAR-VIEW MIRRORWARNING
It is absolutely forbidden
to carry out whatever after-market operation involving
steering system or steering column
modifications (e.g.: installation ofanti-theft device) that could badly
affect performance and safety, cause the lapse of warranty and also
result in non-compliance of the carwith homologation requirements.

DOOR MIRRORSThe mirror, fitted with a safety device
which releases it in the event of a violent
impact can be moved to two positions: normal or anti-glare by operating lever (A-fig.
29).

– move switch (A) to (B) to adjust theleft door mirror.
Move switch (A) to (D) to adjust the rightdoor mirror.
– Then, reposition the switch (A) in theintermediate locking position (C).
IMPORTANT The mirror can only be adjusted electrically when the ignition key isin the MAR position.

A0B0022m

fig. 29

A0B0284m

fig. 30

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNING
The steering wheel position must only be adjustedwith the car stationary.

23

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Folding (fig. 31)

Defrosting/demisting (fig. 32)

POWER WINDOWS– If necessary (for example when the sizeof the mirror causes difficulty in narrow
spaces) the door mirror can be folded in towards the car from position (A) to position(B).

The electric mirrors can be fitted with heating coils which are operated together withrearscreen heating pressing button (A) andprevent the mirrors from frosting and/or
misting.

FRONTIMPORTANT This function is timed andis deactivated after a few minutes.
WARNING
When travelling the door
mirrors must always be inposition (A).
WARNINGAs the driver’s door mirror is curved, it may slightly alter the perception of distance.
A0B0370m

24

fig. 31

A0B0399m

fig. 32

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

IMPORTANT With ignition key at
STOP windows can be opened manuallyfor about max. 2 minutes or until opening
one of the front doors.

D – right rear window (where fitted)

Passenger’s (fig. 34)

The driver’s door panel plate contains the
buttons which, with the ignition key atMAR, operate the following windows:
A – left front window
B – right front window

E – rear door window control inhibitor(where fitted) (with the inhibitor activatedthe button is up, press again to re-enable
the rear buttons).

REAR
The rear doors are fitted with power windows with split controls on driver’s door (Cand D-fig. 35) and on each rear door (Afig. 36).

A0B0033m

Button (A) is used to operate the passenger’s window.
IMPORTANT The passenger’s window
is fitted with a device for “continuous automatic operation“ only for lowering it. The
device works as described for the driver’s
window.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

C – left rear window (where fitted)

IMPORTANT The driver’s power window
is fitted with a “continuous automatic operation“ for both lowering and raising the window device. A brief press on the upper orlower part of the button will cause the window to move and continue its stroke automatically: the window stops in the position
required by pressing either the upper or lower part of the button again.

Driver’s (fig. 33-35)

fig. 35
A0B0031m

fig. 33

A0B0032m

fig. 34

fig. 36

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0B0034m

25

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

With the ignition key at MAR, press the
button to lower the window; pull the button
to raise it.

Do not hold the button
down when the window isfully open or fully closed.

SEAT BELTS

To unfasten the seat belts, press button(C). Guide the seat belt with your hand
while it is rewinding, to prevent it from twisting.

USING THE SEAT BELTS
The belt should be worn keeping the chest
straight and rested against the seat back.

WARNING
Never press button (C)when travelling.

Take hold the tongue (A-fig. 37) and insert it into the buckle (B), until hearing thelocking click.
At removal, if it jams, let it rewind for ashort stretch, then pull it out again without
jerking.

WARNING
Incorrect use of the power windows can be dangerous. Before and during operation of them always make surethat the passengers are not exposed to the risk of harm caused
either directly by the windows inmotion or by personal objects
drawn or knocked by them.

Through the reel, the belt automatically
adapts to the body of the passenger wearing it, allowing freedom of movement.
When the car is parked on a steep slope
the reel mechanism may block; this is normal. The reel mechanism prevents the webbing coming out when it is jerked or if thecar brakes sharply, in a collision or when cornering at high speed.

A0B0325m

A0B0300m

WARNING
When leaving the car always remove the ignition
key to prevent passengers (especially children) from being injuredby the power windows inadvertently operated.

26

fig. 37

fig. 38

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

WARNING
To offer the highest levelof protection, the rear seatbelts should be fastened as shownin fig. 38 and fig. 40.

In order to ensure that the correct tabs, arefitted in the correct clips, the tabs of the side
belts and the clip of the central belt (onlyabdominal) are incompatible (fig. 39).

A0B0301m

WARNING
Proper backrest coupling isguaranteed when button(A-fig. 42) set near each handle (B)is retracted in the handle.

WARNING
Make sure the seat back iscorrectly hooked on bothsides (not visible red buttons (A) toprevent seat back being thrownforwards and injuring passengers
should you brake sharply.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

The rear seat is fitted with inertial seat belts
with three anchor points with reel for theside seats and an abdominal belt with two
anchor points for the centre (A-fig. 38)
seat. On request for versions/markets
where applicable, the centre seat, too, may
be fitted with a headrest and inertial beltwith three anchor points with reel like thetwo sides (fig. 40).

fig. 40
A0B0466m

fig. 39

A0B0467m

fig. 41

fig. 42

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0B0123m

27

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNING
Remember that, in theevent of an accident, any
passengers occupying the rearseats who are not wearing a seatbelt not only subject themselves togreat personal risk but constitutea danger to the occupants of thefront seats.

When the rear seats are not occupied, use
the proper pockets (A-fig. 43) on thebackrest to stow the seat belt clips neatly,
the tab (B) of the central abdominal belt
shall be fitted into (C) (see next paragraph“Rear abdominal centre belt housing”).

To adjust the belt, run the tape in the buckle (D) pulling the end (E) to tighten andpart (F) to loosen.

fig. 43

IMPORTANT The belt is adjusted properly when it fits closely across the hips.

A0B0003m

fig. 44

A0B0468m

fig. 45

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

WARNING
Always hook the belt tip
when it is not used to prevent it from hitting the occupantsin the event of a crash.

Press button (C) to release the belt.

A0B0118m

28

When the rear centre belt, which is of theabdominal type, is not in use, hook the
tongue (A) in the special support (B) on
the rear seat back.

REAR CENTRAL ABDOMINAL
BELT (fig. 44)
Fasten the belt by inserting the tab (A) into the clip (B), until a click is heard.

WARNING
After tilting, when resetting
the rear seat in straight position, take care to reposition theseat belt properly to have it readyfor use.

REAR ABDOMINAL CENTRE
BELT HOUSING (fig. 45)

Always adjust the height of belts adapting
them to the size of the person wearing them.
This precaution will improve their effectiveness, substantially reducing the risk of injury
in the event of a crash.

To adjust the belt, use handle (A-fig. 46)(front seat belts) or (A- fig. 47) (rear side
belts, Sportwagon versions only) as shownby the arrow and raise or lower the rocker
ring (B) to the most suitable of the possible positions. After adjusting, release handle(A).

Correct adjustment is obtained when thebelt passes about half way between the endof the shoulder and the neck.

WARNING
After adjustment, always
check that the slider (B) is
anchored in one of the positions
provided. To do this, with the button (A-fig. 46) or (A-fig. 47) released, exert a further pressure toallow the anchor device to catch if
release did not take place at one ofthe preset positions.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

ADJUSTING THE HEIGHTOF FRONT AND REAR SIDESEAT BELTS(Sportwagon versions only)

WARNING
Make the height adjustment when the car is stationary.

A0B0029m

fig. 45

A0B0099m

29

fig. 46

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

PRE-TENSIONING DEVICES
To increase the efficiency of the front seatbelts, Alfa 156 GTA is fitted with pretensioning devices.
These devices “feel” that the car is being
subject to a violent impact by way of a sensor rewind the seat belts a few centimetres.
In this way they ensure that the seat belt
adheres to the wearer before the restraining
action begins.
The seat belt locks to indicate that the device has intervened; the seat belt cannot be
drawn back up even when guiding it manually.

IMPORTANT The pretensioner will give
maximum protection when the seat belt adheres snugly to wearer’s chest and hips.
Front seat pretensioners activate only iffront seat belts are properly fitted into buckles.
A small amount of smoke may be produced. This smoke is in no way toxic andpresents no fire hazard.
The emergency tensioning retractor needs
no maintenance or lubrication. Any modification to its original features will nullify theretractor’s effectiveness. If, due to unusual
natural events (floods, high waves, etc.),
the device has been affected by water andmud, it must be replaced.

30

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

WARNING
The pretensioner can only
be used once. After a collision that has triggered it, have it
replaced at Alfa Romeo Authorized
Service. The validity of the device
is written on the plate located on
the front left door near the lock.
Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services to have pretensioner replaced as this date approaches.

Operations
involvingbanging, vibrations or
heating (above 100°C fora maximum of 6 hours) in the areaof the pretensioners may damage
or trigger off the device. Vibrations
from rough road surfaces or accidental jolting caused by mounting
pavements etc. do not have any effect on the pretensioner. If, however, you need assistance, go to
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONSFOR THE USE OF THE
SEAT BELTS
All the occupants of the car are obliged torespect the local traffic laws regarding thewearing of seat belts.
Always fasten the seat belts before starting.

WARNINGTo ensure the highest degree of protection, you arerecommended to keep the seatbackrest in the straightest position
possible, and the belt adhering wellto the chest and pelvis.
Seat belt should always be wornin both the front and rear positions!
Travelling without seat belt increases the risk of serious injury or
death in the case of accident.

WARNING
Under no circumstances
should the components ofthe seat belts and pretensioner betampered with or removed. Any
operation should be carried out by
qualified and authorised personnel.
Always contact an Alfa Romeo Authorized Service.

WARNING
The seat belt must not be
twisted and should cling
tightly to the body. The upper part
must pass over the shoulder anddiagonally across the chest. The
lower part must rest across thepelvis and not across the stomach
to eliminate the risk of sliding forwards (fig. 48). Do not use devices(clips, stoppers, etc.) which keep
the belts away from the body.

A0B0004m

fig. 48

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNING
Never disassemble ortamper with the pretensioner components. All interventions must be carried out by qualified and authorised personnel.
Always contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

31

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNING
If the seat belt has been
subjected to shock, for example during an accident, it must
be completely replaced together
with the attachments and theirscrews, and the pretensioning devices, even if visible defects are notdetected as the belt may have lostits resilience.

Seat belts are also to be worn by expectant mothers: the risk of injury in the caseof accident is greatly reduced for them andthe unborn child if they are wearing a seatbelt.
Pregnant women must of course position
the lower part of the belt very low down
so that it passes under the abdomen (fig.
50).
HOW TO KEEP THE SEAT BELTS
ALWAYS IN EFFICIENT
CONDITIONSWARNING
Do not carry children on
your knee using a single
seat belt for both (fig. 49). Do notfasten other objects to the body.

– Always use the belts with the tape welltaut and never twisted; make sure that it
is free to run without impediments.

– After a serious accident, replace the belt
being worn at that time, even if it does notappear damaged. Always replace the seatbelts if pretensioners have been activated.
– To clean the belts, wash by hand withneutral soap, rinse and leave to dry in theshade. Never use strong detergents, bleachor dyes or any other chemical substance thatmight weaken the fibres.
– Prevent the reels from getting wet: correct operation of them is only guaranteed
if water does not get inside.
– Replace the seat belt if it shows significant wear or cut signs.

A0B0007m

32

fig. 49

fig. 50

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0B0008m

For the best level of protection in the eventof a crash, all occupants must travel seatedand secured by suitable restraint systems.

WARNINGSERIOUS DANGER! Never place cradle child’s seats on thefront passenger seats of cars equipped with passenger air
bag since the air bag activation could cause serious injuries, even mortal.
You are advised to carry children always on the rear seat, as this is themost protected position in the case of a crash. In any case, child’s seatsmust absolutely not be positioned on the front seat of car’s with passenger’s air bag, which during inflation could cause serious injury, even mortal, regardless of the seriousness of the crash that triggered it. Children
may placed on the front seat of cars fitted with passenger’s air bag deactivation. In this case, it is absolutely necessary to check the warning light
F on the check panel to make sure that deactivation has actually took
place (see paragraph “Front and side air bags“ at item “Front passenger
air bag“). The front passenger seat shall be adjusted in the most backward
position to prevent any contact between the child’s seat and the dashboard.

This is even more important for children.
According to 2003/20/EC Directive, thisprescription is compulsory for all European
Community countries.
Compared with adults, a child’s head is
proportionately larger and heavier than therest of the body, while muscles and bone
structure are not completely developed.
Therefore, in order to restraint them correctlyin the event of a crash, different systems areneeded then adult seat belts.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARCARRYING CHILDREN SAFELY

A0B0001m

33

fig. 51

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

The results of research on the best protection for a child are summarised in European Standard ECE-R44, which in addition
to making them compulsory, subdivides restraint systems into five groups:
Group 0

until 10 kg in weightGroup 0+

until 13 kg in weightGroup 1

9-18 kg in weightGroup 2

15-25 kg in weightGroup 322-36 kg in weight

As it may be noted, the groups partiallyoverlap and in fact, in commerce it is possible to find devices that cover more than
one weight group (fig. 52).
All the restraint devices must bear the homologation data, together with the control
brand, on a solidly fixed label which must
absolutely not be removed.

GROUP 0 and 0+

GROUP 1Babies up to 13 kg must be carried facing behind (fig. 52) on a cradle seat,
which, supporting the head, does not induce
strain on the neck in the event of sharp deceleration.

Starting from 9 kg to 18 kg in weight, children may be carried facing forwards withseats fitted with front cushion (fig. 53),
through which the car seat belt restrains bothchild and seat.

The cradle is restrained by the car safety
belts, as illustrated, and it should in turnrestrain the child with the belts incorporated on it.
WARNING
The illustration is indicative only for assembly. Assemble the seat according to thecompulsory instructions provided
with it.

Over 1.50 m in height, from the point ofview of restraint systems, children are considered as adults and wear belts normally.

WARNING
The illustration is indicative only for assembly. Assemble the seat according to thecompulsory instructions provided
with it.

A0B0005m

A0B0006m

The Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo includes
seats for each weight group, which are therecommended choice because they havebeen designed and specifically experimented for Alfa Romeo cars.

34

fig. 52

fig. 53

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GROUP 2

GROUP 3

Starting from 15 to 25 kg in weight, children may be restrained directly by the carseat belts. Child seats only have the function of positioning the child correctly in relation to the belts, so that the diagonal part
adheres to the chest and never to the neckand that the horizontal part adheres to thechild’s pelvis and not to the abdomen (fig.
54).

For children from 22 kg up to 36 kg thechild’s chest is thick enough not to need thespacer back rest any more.

WARNING
The illustration is indicative only for assembly. Assemble the seat according to thecompulsory instructions provided
with it.

WARNING
The illustration is indicative only for assembly. Assemble the seat according to thecompulsory instructions provided
with it.

Fig. 55 shows proper child seat positioning on the rear seat.
Over 1.50 m tall children may wear seatbelts like adults.

A0B0002m

fig. 54

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0B0009m

fig. 55

AlfaWiki.nl

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNING
Seats exist which are suitable for covering weightgroups 0 and 1 with a rear connection to the car belts and its own
belts to restrain the child. Becauseof their mass, they can be dangerous if installed incorrectly fastened
to the car belts with a cushion.
Strictly adhere to the assembly instructions provided.

35

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

PASSENGER SEAT COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS ON CHILD’S SEAT USE
Alfa 156 GTA complies with the new EC Directive 2000/3 regulating child’s seat assembling on the different car seats according to
the following table:
Rear seat for saloon and Sportwagon versions
Group

Range of weight

SEAT
Front passenger

Rear sidepassenger seat

Rear centre
Rear centre
passenger seatpassenger seat(inertial seat belt with (centre lap belt withthree anchor points) two anchor points)

Group 0,0+

0 - 13 kg

L

U

U

(*)

Group 1

9 -18 kg

L

U

U

(*)

Group 215 - 25 kg

L

U

U

(*)

Group 322 - 36 kg

L

U

U

(*)

Key:
U = suitable for child restraint systems of the “Universal“ category, according to European Standard ECE-R44 for the specified “Groups“
L = suitable for certain child’s restraint systems available at Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo for the specified group(*) = child’s seats cannot be installed on the rear centre seat with lap belt with two anchor points

36

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1) The recommended position for installing a child’s seat is on the rear seat, as
it is the most protected in the event of acrash.
WARNING
If a passenger’s air bag isinstalled, children should
never travel on the front seat.

2) If the passenger’s air bag is deactivated always check that deactivation has taken place through the special warning lightF.

4) Always pull the tape to check that thebelts are buckled.
5) All restraint systems are strictly for one
child only: never use for two children at thesame time.
6) Always make sure that the belts do notrest on the child’s neck.
7) During the journey, do not allow thechild to stay in abnormal positions or release
the belts.
8) Do not carry children in your arms, noteven small babies. No-one, however strong,
can keep hold of them in a crash.
9) In the case of accidents, replace thechild’s seat with a new one.

3) Carefully follow the instructions provided with the child’s seat, which the supplier is obliged to attach. Keep them in the
car together with the documents and thisbooklet. Do not use used seats without the
instructions for use.

PRESETTING FOR INSTALLING
THE “ISOFIX TYPE“
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
The car is created preset for mounting the
Isofix type child restraint system. Isofix is a
new European standardised system for carrying children. Isofix type child restraint system
is an additional option that does not preventfrom using traditional child restraint systems.
type Isofix type child restraint system covers
three weight groups: 0, 0+ and 1.
Due to its different anchoring system, theIsofix type child’s seat should be anchoredusing only the proper brackets provided forthe purpose in the car.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Below is a summary of the safety rules to be observed when carrying children:

It is possible to mount both the traditional restraint system and the Isofix type one,
one on the left and the other on the right,
for example.
Since sizes are different, it is possible toinstall max two Isofix type child's seats using the proper couplings on the rear seator three traditional child's seats using theseat belts. On the front passenger seat it ispossible to mount only traditional child'sseats.

37

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

The car is fitted (optional for versions/markets where applicable) with the Kiddy Isofix
seat, certified according to European Standard ECE-R44/03 for babies up to 18 kg
weight to be positioned facing the running
direction and the seat for babies up to 13
kg weight to be positioned facing backwards(groups 0,0+ and 1).

We recommend to adopt these child’sseats since they have been designed and experimented expressly for Alfa 156 GTA.

A0B0298m

Isofix type child’s seats are to be anchored
to two metal brackets, set between the rearseat back and the cushion and that can be
identified through the slots in the seat cover (A-fig. 56).

WARNING
Install the child restraint
system only with the car
stationary. The Isofix type child restraint system is properly anchoredto the preset brackets when clicks
are heard. In any case, keep to theinstallation instructions that must
be provided by the child restraint
system’s Manufacturer.

If using Isofix type child's seats, remember that just those specifically designed, experimented and certifed for the car can be
used.

38

fig. 56

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

For proper installation proceed as follows:

For children of the 0, 0+ weight group, thechild’s seat is facing backwards (babies up
to 13 kg) and the child is restrained by thechild’s seat belts (D-fig. 57).

– check whether the release lever (Bfig. 57) is at rest position (inward)– find the presetting brackets (A), thenposition the child’s seat with the fastening
devices (C) aligned with the brackets– push the child restraint system until hearing the locking clicks.

A0B0400m

A0B0401m

As the child grows up, passing to weightgroup 1 the child’s seat should be mounted
facing forwards (running direction).
Installation of the seat
for weight group 1
For proper installation proceed as follows:– check whether the release lever (Bfig. 58) is at rest position (inward)– find the presetting brackets (A), thenposition the child’s seat with the fastening
devices (C) aligned with the brackets– push the child restraint system until hearing the locking clicks.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Installation of the seat
for the 0 and 0+ groups

If the Isofix type seat is positioned facing
backwards, the passenger’s seat must be
positioned completely back until touching
the child’s seat back.

fig. 57

39

fig. 58

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARFRONT AND SIDE
AIR BAGSFRONT AIR BAGS
Description and operation

The car is fitted with front Air bags for thedriver (fig. 59), for the passenger (fig.
60), side bags (fig. 61) and window bags
(fig. 62).

The front air bag (driver’s and passenger’s)
is a safety device that comes into action in
the event of a head-on collision.
It is formed of an instantly-inflating cushion contained in a special recess:– in the centre of the steering wheel forthe driver;– in the dashboard and with a larger-sizedcushion for the passenger.

A0B0396m

40

fig. 59

In the event of a crash, the electronic control unit processes the signals leading froma deceleration sensor and when necessary,triggers inflation of the cushion.

A0B0276m

fig. 60

A0B0452m

fig. 61

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

The front Air bag (driver’s and passenger’s)
is a device designed to protect the occupantsin the event of head-on collision of mediumhigh severity by the interposition of the cushion between the occupant and the steering
wheel or dashboard.

Front air bags are designed to protect car’s
occupants in front crashes and therefore nonactivation in other types of collisions (sidecollisions, rear-end shunts, roll-overs, etc…)
is not a system malfunction.

The front air bag (driver’s and passenger’s)does not replace but is complementary to
the use of belts, which should always beworn, as specified by law in Europe andmost non-European countries.

In collisions against highly deformable ormobile objects (road signposts, heaps of ice
or snow, etc.), rear collisions (hit from behind by another vehicle), side collisions,wedging under other vehicles or protective
barriers (for example under a lorry or guardrail) cutting in of the air bag is not activated as it does not offer any more protection
than the seat belts therefore activation
would be inappropriate.

In the event of a crash a person that is notwearing the seat belt moves forwards andmay come into contact with the cushion
while it is still opening. Under these circumstances the protection offered by thecushion is reduced.

WARNING
Please don’t apply stickers
or other objects to thesteering wheel, to the air-bag cover on the passenger's side or on theside roof lining to the upholsteryon the roof side. Don’t place objects on the dashboard passenger’s
side (such as mobile phones) because they could tamper with thecorrect opening of the passenger’s
air-bag and than cause serious injuries to the vehicle occupants.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

The cushion inflates instantly as a protective barrier between the occupants’ bodies
and the structures which could cause injury.
The cushion deflates immediately afterwards.

Therefore the failure to be triggered does
not mean that the system is not working
properly.

A0B0277m

41

fig. 62

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

PASSENGER’S FRONTAIR BAG
The passenger’s front air bag has been designed to improve the protection of a person wearing a seat belt.
Its volume at maximum inflation fills mostof the space between the dashboard and thepassenger.

ATTENTIONSERIOUS DANGER:
The car is fitted withfront passenger’s air bag. Neverplace cradle child’s seats on the front
passenger seat of cars equippedwith passenger air bag since the air
bag activation could cause serious
injuries, even mortal. In the case ofneed, always deactivate the passenger’s air bag when a child’s seatis placed on the front seat. The front
passenger seat shall be adjusted in
the most backward position to prevent any contact between child’sseat and dashboard. Even if not
ruled by law, for better protectionof adults you are recommended toreactivate the air bag immediately
as soon as child transport is nolonger necessary.

42

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

MANUAL DEACTIVATIONOF PASSENGER’S FRONTAIR BAG
Should it be absolutely necessary to carry a child on the front seat, the passenger’s
front air bag can be deactivated.
Deactivation/reactivation takes place withignition key at STOP and operating it in thespecial key switch on the right-hand side ofthe dashboard (fig. 63). Access to theswitch is only possible with the door open.

WARNING
Use the switch only withthe engine off and the ignition key removed.

1) Passenger’s front Air bag active: (ONposition P) warning light on check panel
off; it is absolutely prohibited to carry children on the front seat.
2) Passenger’s front Air bag deactivated:(OFF position F) warning light F on
check panel on; it is possible to carry children protected by special restraint systems
on the front seat.

The warning light F on the check panel glows steadily until the passenger’s Air
bag is reactivated.

SIDE AIR BAGS(SIDE BAG - WINDOW BAG)

Deactivation of the front passenger’s air
bag does not prevent operation of the side
Air bag.

The side bag and window bag have thetask of increasing protection of the occupants in the event of a side crash of medium-high severity.

With the door open the key can be inserted
and removed in both positions.

They are formed of an instantaneously-inflating cushion:– the side bag is housed in the back restof the front seats; with this solution it is always possible to have the cushion in the optimum position in relation to the passenger,
regardless of the adjustment of the seat;

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

The key switch (fig. 63) has two positions:– the window bags, which are “curtain“cushions, are housed in the side roof lining
covered by a special trim, which makes it
possible to extend the cushion downwards.
This solution, designed to protect the head,
makes it possible to offer the highest degreeof protection to the front and rear occupantsin the event of side crash, thanks to the wide
cushion inflation surface.

A0B0279m

In the event of a side crash, an electronic
control unit processes the signals leadingfrom a deceleration sensor and activates,when necessary, inflation of the bags.

43

fig. 63

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

The bags inflate instantaneously, setting
themselves between the body of the front
passengers and the car door. The bags deflate immediately afterwards.
In the event of minor side crashes (forwhich the restraining action of the seat belts
is sufficient), the air bags are not deployed.
Also in this case it is of vital importance towear the seat belts since in case of sidecrash they guarantee proper positioning of
the occupant and prevent the occupant tobe pitched out of the car in case of violent
crashes.
Therefore the side air bags do not replace
but are complementary to the use of belts,
which you are recommended to always
wear, as specified by law in Europe and most
non-European countries.
Operation of the side air bags and windowbags is not disabled by the front air bag deactivation switch, as described in the previous paragraphs.

IMPORTANT In the event of side crash,
you can obtain the best protection by thesystem keeping a correct position on theseat, thus allowing correct window bag unfolding.

WARNING
Never rest head, arms
and elbows on the door, on
the windows and in the window
bag area to prevent possible injuries during the inflation phase.

IMPORTANT The front and/or side airbags may be activated if the car is subjected
to heavy shocks or accidents that involve theunderbody area, such as for example violent
bumps against steps, pavements or fixed obstacles on the ground, falling into big holesor bumpy roads.

44

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

IMPORTANT The triggering of air bags
releases a small amount of powder. This powder is not harmful and does not indicate astart of fire; also the surfaces of the deployedbag and the car interior may be covered withdusty residue: this may irritate the skin andeyes. In the event of exposure, wash withneutral soap and water.

WARNING
Never lean head, arms
and elbows out of the window.

The airbag system has a validity of 14
years for the pyrotechnic charge and 10
years for the coil contact (see the plate located on the front left door near the lock).
Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services for
replacement as these dates approach.

All operations involving checking, repairing and replacing components concerning
the Air bag must be carried out by Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services.
If the car is to be demolished, Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services should be contacted beforehand to have the system deactivated.
If the car changes ownership, the newowner must be informed of the instructions
for use and of the above warnings and be
given this “Owner’s Manual“.
IMPORTANT The triggering of the pretensioners, front air bags and side bags isdecided by the electronic control unit in adifferentiated manner depending on the typeof crash. The failure to trigger one or moreof them does not necessarily indicate a system malfunction.

GENERAL CAUTIONSWARNING
If the ¬ warning light does
not turn on when turning
the ignition key to MAR or if it
stays on when travelling, this could
indicate a failure in safety retaining systems; under this condition
air bags or pretensioners could not
trigger in the event of collision or,
in a restricted number of cases,
they could trigger accidentally. Stopthe car and contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to have the system checked immediately.

WARNING
Do not cover the back restof front seats with trims orcovers there are not set for the useof side bags.

WARNING
Never travel with objects
on your lap, in front of thechest or with a pipe, pencil, etc. between your lips. Serious injury may
result in the case of the air bag being triggered.

WARNING
Always keep your handson the steering wheel rim
when driving, so that if the Air bag
is triggered, it can inflate without
meeting any obstacles. Do not drive with the body bent forwards,
keep the seat back rest in the erect
position and lean your back wellagainst it.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

IMPORTANT If an accident has triggered the air bag, Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services must be contacted to have the devices activated replaced and to have thewhole system checked.

WARNING
If the car has been stolenor an attempt to steal it
has been made, if it has been subjected to vandals or floods, havethe Air bag system checked by Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

45

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNINGYou are reminded thatwhen the ignition key isengaged and in the MAR position,
the Air bags can be triggered also
on a stationary vehicle, if it isbumped by another moving vehicle. Therefore, even with the car
stationary, never allow children on
the front seat. You are also reminded that with the car stationary, without the key engaged andturned, the Air bags are not triggered in the event of an impact; inthis case the failure to trigger the
air bags should not be considereda system failure.

WARNING
Turning the ignition key to
MAR the F warning light(with the passenger’s front Air bag
deactivation switch at ON) turns
on for about 4 seconds, and then
flashes for another 4 seconds toremind that the passenger’s Air
bag and corresponding side Airbags will be activated in the eventof a crash, then it goes off.

WARNING
Do not wash the seatback with pressurised water or steam (by hand or at automatic seat washing stations).

46

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

WARNING
The front Air bags are designed to be triggered forheavier crashes than the pretensioners. It is therefore normal forthe pretensioners only to be triggered for crashes within the two
activation thresholds.

WARNING
Do not hook rigid objects
to the coat hooks and to
the support handles.

WARNING
The air bag does not replace the seat belts, but increases their effectiveness. Additionally, as the front air bags are
not triggered for head-on collision
at low speed, side crashes, crashes from behind or overturning, inthese cases the occupants are protected only by the seat belts, whichmust, therefore, always be fastened.

The devices and services controlled by thelevers on the steering wheel can only be activated when the ignition key is in the MAR
position.
LEFT-HAND LEVER
The left-hand lever controls the external
lights except the foglamps and the rear foglight.

Lights switched off (fig. 64)

Dipped-beam headlights (fig. 66)

When the pointer on the knurled ring is opposite the symbol O, the external lights are
switched off.

These are switched on by turning theknurled ring from 6 to 2.

Sidelights (fig. 65)
The sidelights are switched on by turning
the knurled ring from O to 6.
The 3 warning light on the instrument
panel will come on at the same time.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARSTEERING WHEEL
LEVERS

When the external lights are switched on
the various controls located on the dashboard are illuminated.
The sidelights will come on if the ignition
key is in the PARK position, regardless ofthe position of the knurled ring.
A0B0371m

fig. 64

A0B0372m

fig. 65

fig. 66

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0B0373m

47

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Main-beam headlights (fig. 67)
When the knurled ring is in the 2 position, the headlights can be changed fromdipped-beam to main-beam by pushing thelever towards the dashboard (stable position). The 1 warning light will come onon the instrument panel.
To return from main-beam to dipped-beam,
once again pull the lever towards the steering wheel and then release.
Flashing (fig. 68)
The headlights are flashed by pulling thelever towards the steering wheel (unstable position) regardless of the position of the knurled
ring. The 1 warning light on the instrument
panel will come on at the same time.

Direction indicators(fig. 69)
Moving the lever to the stable position will:
up - engage the right-hand direction indicators.

IMPORTANT If you wish to signal a
rapid change of direction involving only aminimum movement of the steering wheel,
the lever can be moved up or down without
clicking (unstable position). When released
the lever will return to its home position.

down - engage the left-hand direction indicators.
One of the warning lights (R or E) will
come on on the instrument panel at thesame time.

A0B0376m

The lever is returned to its home position
automatically and the indicators are
switched off when the steering wheel isstraightened.

IMPORTANT Only the main-beam lights
are flashed. To avoid penalties, follow local
regulations.
A0B0374m

48

fig. 67

A0B0375m

fig. 68

fig. 69

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

The right-hand lever is used to operate thewindscreen wiper and windscreen washer.
The control used to activate the windscreen
washers also activates the headlights washers, if fitted.

Windscreen wiper - windscreen
washer (fig. 70-71)
The lever can be moved to five different
positions corresponding to:
A - Stationary (off).
B - Intermittent.

A0B0250m

With the lever in position (B), turning thering (F) four possible intermittent speeds
are obtained:■= intermittent slow.
■■= intermittent medium.
■■■ = intermittent medium-fast.
■■■■ = intermittent fast.

C - Continuous, slow.
D - Continuous, fast.
E - Fast, temporary (unstable position).
Operation in position (E) is limited to thetime the lever is held in this position. Whenthe lever is released, it returns to position(A) automatically stopping the wiper.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

RIGHT-HAND LEVER

A0B0377m

fig. 7049

fig. 71

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR“INTELLIGENT(fig. 72)

WASHING“FUNCTION

Pulling the lever towards the steering
wheel (unstable position) operates the windscreen washer.
Keeping the lever pulled, with only one
movement it is possible to operate the washer jet and the wiper at the same time; indeed,
the latter comes into action automatically if
the lever is pulled for more than half a second.
The wiper stops working a few strokes after releasing the lever; a further “cleaning
stroke“ after a few seconds completes thewiping operation.

Rain sensor (fig. 73)
The rain sensor (A), is an electronic device combined with the windscreen wiper
which has the purpose of automatically adjusting the number of wipes during intermittent operation, to intensity of the rain.
All the other functions controlled by theright-hand lever remain unchanged.
The rain sensor is activated automaticallymoving the right-hand lever to position (Bfig. 70) and it has a range of adjustmentthat gradually varies between wiper stationary (no wiping) when the windscreen isdry, to wiper at first continuous speed (continuous, slow) with heavy rain.

A0B0378m

50

fig. 72

A0B0012m

fig. 73

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Turn ring (F-fig. 71) to set the rain sensor sensitivity level:
AUTO = automatic sensitivity setting.
■■= low sensitivity■■■ = medium sensitivity■■■■ = high sensitivity.
Operating the windscreen washer with therain sensor activated (lever at position B)
the normal washing cycle is performed at
the end of which the rain sensor resumes its
normal automatic function.
Turning the ignition key to STOP the rain
sensor is deactivated and the next time theengine is started (MAR position) it will not
be reactivated even if the lever has remainedin position (B). In this case to activate therain sensor, simply move the lever to (A)or (C) and then back to (B).

At each start, the rain sensor automaticallystabilises at a temperature of about 40°C
to eliminate any condensation from the control surface and prevent the formation of ice.

IMPORTANT In case of failure of theright-hand stroke or rain sensor, windscreen
wiper operation with the right-hand leverat (B) shall take place in intermittent mode.

The rain sensor is able to detect and automatically adapt to the presence of the following particular conditions which requiredifferent sensitivity:

The rain sensor is located behind the innerrear-view mirror in contact with the windscreen and inside the area cleaned by thewiper and it controls an electronic control
unit which in turns controls the wiper motor.

– impurities on the control surface (salt,
dirt, etc.);

Headlight washers (fig. 74)
These are operated when the sidelights areon and the windscreen washer is switchedon.

– streaks of water caused by worn wiper
blades;– difference between day and night (thehuman eye is more disturbed during thenight by the wet glass surface).

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

When the rain sensor is reactivated, thewiper performs one stroke, even if the windscreen is dry, to indicate that reactivation
has occurred.

A0B0379m

fig. 74

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

51

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

CRUISE CONTROL(optional for versions/markets
where applicable)
GENERAL
The speed regulator (CRUISE CONTROL), with electronic control, makes it
possible to drive the car at the required
speed without pressing the accelerator pedal. This reduces driving fatigue on motorways, especially during long journeys because the speed memorised is automaticallymaintained.

The device is disengaged automatically in
any one of the following cases:– pressing the brake pedal;– pressing the clutch pedal;

CONTROLS (fig. 75)
Cruise Control is controlled by the
ON/OFF knurled ring (A), by the +/–ring (B) and by the RCL button (C).
Ring (A) has two positions:– if the ASR system cuts in;– with Selespeed transmission if a gear ischanged;– if car speed is below the set limit;– if operating the gear lever without pressing the clutch pedal.

IMPORTANT The device can only be engaged at speeds above 30 km/h.

– OFF: in this position the device is deactivated;– ON: is the normal operating position of
the device: the warning light Ü on the checkpanel turns on.
Ring (B) serves for memorising and maintaining the car speed or for increasing or lowering the speed memorised.
Turn the ring (B) to (+) to memorise thespeed reached or increase the speed memorised.

The device may only be engaged in the 4th
or 5th gear. Travelling downhill with the device engaged, the car speed may increase
more than the memorised one, due to thechange in the engine load.

Turn the ring (B) to (–) to lower the speed
memorised.
A0B0055m

Each time the ring is actuated (B) the speed
increases or lowers by about 1 km/h.
Keeping the ring turned the speed changes
continuously. The new speed reached will
be maintained automatically.
The RCL button (C) resets the memorised
speed.

52

fig. 75

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

The ring (A) can be constantly left to ON
without damaging the device. However, wesuggest to disconnect the device when it is
not used, turning the ring to OFF, to avoid
fortuitous speed memorisations.

TO MEMORISE THE SPEED
Move the ring (A) to ON and take the car
to the required speed normally. Turn the ring(B) to (+) for at least three seconds, thenrelease it. The car speed is memorised and
it is therefore possible to release the accelerator pedal.
The car will continue to travel at the memorised constant speed until one of the following condition takes place:– pressing the brake pedal;– pressing the clutch pedal;

TO RESET THE MEMORISED
SPEED
If the device has been disengaged for example pressing the brake or clutch pedal,
the memorised speed can be reset as follows:– accelerate gradually until reaching a
speed approaching the one memorised;– engage the gear selected at the timeof speed memorising (4th or 5th speed);– press the RCL button (C).

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

IMPORTANT Turning the ignition key to
STOP or the ring (A) to OFF, the speed
memorised is cleared and the system isswitched off.

– if the ASR system cuts in;– with Selespeed transmission if a gear ischanged.
IMPORTANT In the case of need (whenovertaking for instance) acceleration is possible simply pressing the accelerator pedal;
later, releasing the accelerator pedal, the car
will return to the speed memorised previously.

53

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

TO INCREASE
THE MEMORISED SPEEDRESETTING THE MEMORISED
SPEED

The speed memorised can be increasedin two ways:

The memorised speed is automatically reset turning off the engine or moving the ring(A) to OFF.

1) pressing the accelerator and then memorising the new speed reached (turning thering (B) for more than three seconds);or2) momentaneously turning the ring (B)to (+): each pulse of the ring will correspondto a slight increase in speed (about 1 km/h)
while pressing continuously will correspondto a continuous speed increase. Releasing thering (B) the new speed will be memorised
automatically.
TO REDUCE
THE MEMORISED SPEEDWARNING
When travelling with thecruise control on, do not
move the gearshift lever to neutral.

WARNING
The cruise control may only be engaged at speeds
above 30 km/h.

The speed memorised can be reduced in
two ways:1) disengaging the device (for instancepressing the brake pedal) and then memorising the new speed (turning the ring (B)to (+) for at least three seconds);
2) keeping the ring pressed (B) at (–)
until reaching the new speed which will bememorised automatically.

54

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

WARNING
It is advisable to engage
the cruise control only
when the conditions of the traffic
or road so permit under completely safe conditions: i.e.: straight anddry roads, dual carriageways or
motorways, flowing traffic andsmooth road surface. Do not engage the device in town or inheavy traffic conditions.

WARNING
If the device is faulty or
not working, turn the ring(A) to OFF and contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services after checking
that the protection fuse is intact.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARDASHBOARD

A0B0407m

fig. 76
1. Side air outlets - 2. Defrosting/demisting vents for side windows - 3. Upper side vents - 4. Radio controls on the steering wheel (whereapplicable) - 5. Outside lights control lever - 6. Speedometer (mileage recorder) - 7. Check panel - 8. Rev counter - 9. Windscreen wiper control lever - 10. Fuel level gauge - 11. Centre air vents - 12. Infocenter Display - 13. Clock - 14. Engine coolant temperature gauge 15. Sound system - 16. Passenger’s Air bag - 17. Glove box - 18. Controls for heating, ventilation and climate control - 19. Ashtray and cigar lighter - 20. Hazard warning lights switch - 21. Ignition switch - 22. Steering wheel lock/release lever - 23. Driver’s Air bag and horns 24. Cruise Control control lever (if provided) - 25. Bonnet opening lever - 26. Set of controls: instrument panel lighting adjustment, trip meter reset and headlamp aiming device

55

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

A0B0282m

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

fig. 77
A. Speedometer (mileage recorder) - B. Odometer with double counter (total and partial) display - C. Check panel - D. Rev counter - E. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning light - F. Clock - G. Engine coolant temperature gauge with maximum temperature warning light H. Warning lights.

56

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

The danger zone (red) indicates excessivehigh engine revs. Do not drive for long periods with the pointer in this area.
IMPORTANT The electronic injection control system gradually shuts off the flow of fuel when the engine is “over-revving“ resulting in a gradual loss of engine power.
The rev counter may, when the engine is
idling, indicate gradual or sudden increaseof engine revs as the case may be; such behaviour is normal and must not be interpreted as a faulty condition as it occurs during normal operation, for instance whenclimate control or electric fan are switched
on. In particular, slow revs variation helps
keep the battery charged.

FUEL GAUGE AND RESERVEIMPORTANT LIGHT
This shows the amount of fuel left in thefuel tank.

ENGINE COOLANTTEMPERATURE GAUGE
AND MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE
IMPORTANT LIGHT

This warning light ç comes on to indicatethat approximately 7 litres of fuel are left in
the tank.

This shows the temperature of the engine
coolant fluid and begins when the fluid temperature exceeds approx. 50°C.

IMPORTANT Under certain conditions(heavy slopes, for instance), the reading on
the gauge may differ from the actual amountof fuel in the tank and changes in level may
be indicated late.

The pointer should normally be towards
the middle of the scale. If the pointer reaches the higher temperature values of the scale(red area), the request for vehicle performance should be decreased.

This condition falls within the operation logics of the electronic control circuit to avoid
highly unstable readings due to swaying of
the fuel when travelling.

The illumination of the ç warning light (together with the message shown by the Infocenter display) indicates an excessive temperature of the engine cooling fluid. In thiscase, stop the car and contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

IMPORTANT Refuelling shall always be
performed with engine off and ignition key
to STOP. If the engine is off but the key
is to MAR, a wrong fuel level could temporarily be indicated. This is due to the internal system control logic and cannot be
considered as a system malfunctioning.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

REV COUNTERIMPORTANT The temperature of the engine coolant may rise towards the maximum
values (red) when the vehicle is driven at low
speeds, especially when the ambient air temperature is high. In this case, the vehicle should
be stopped and the engine switched off for a
few minutes after which the journey can beresumed, preferably at a higher speed.

57

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARODOMETER(with double counter display)

INFOCENTER DISPLAYRHEOSTAT LIGHTS ADJUSTMENT

The display shows:– the mileage on the first line (6 figures)– the trip meter (4 figures) and theoutside temperature (where applicable)on the second line.
To reset the trip meter, keep the button(A-fig. 78) pressed for a few seconds.

This function makes it possible to adjust
the brightness (dimming/brightening) of
the Infocenter display during night and day.
To perform the desired brightness adjustment (night or day), use buttons â or ã,
bearing in mind that:– if the outside lights are on, the message BRIGHTN. ADJUST. NIGHT will appear
on the display (fig. 79)

A0B0489m

58

fig. 78

Pressing button â, or after about 5 seconds from last operation performed, returns
to previous screen.
IMPORTANT During failure indication
displaying, brightness cannot be adjusted
since under these conditions the display gets
automatically to max. brightness.

A0B2008g

fig. 79

A0B2007g

fig. 80

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine– if the outside lights are off, the message
BRIGHTN. ADJUST. DAY will appear on thedisplay (fig. 80).

INFORMATION AVAILABLEON STANDARD SCREENINFORMATION ABOUT
VEHICLE CONDITION (for each event)The Infocenter display is able to display all
the useful and necessary information during
driving, in particular:– Date (A-fig. 81)– Scheduled maintenance programme expiry– Outside temperature (B-fig. 81)– Last item recalled from the Trip computer(e.g. Average velocity C-fig. 81) orengine oil temperature– Warning message display with respective
symbols (e.g. icy roads D- fig. 81).
The standard screen will remain on until
a function is activated which requires being shown on the display (e.g. “Infocenter
display rheostat lights adjustment“).

– Trip computer information– Rheostat brightness adjustment.
Moreover, a menu is available which allows the driver to perform, by operating thecontrol buttons (see “Control buttons“ in thenext pages) the following controls and settings:

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

INFOCENTER DISPLAY

A0B2107g

59

fig. 81

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Set-up menu
SPEED LIMIT– Switching on/off the relevant signal(ON/OFF)– Speed limit setting
TRIP B ON/OFF– Switching on/off the relevant function(ON/OFF)DATE SETTING/TIME SETTING– Day setting– Month setting– Year setting– Hour setting– Minute setting
LANGUAGE SELECTION– Setting the language for the messages
shown on the display

UNITS SELECTIONDISPLAY CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT– Selection of the following units: km or
mi (miles), °C or °F, l/100 km or
km/l– Infocenter display graphics contrast setting (dimming/brightening)“DEFAULT“ VALUES RESETIMPORTANT/FAILURE BUZZERVOLUME SETTING– Volume setting of warning/failurebuzzer“WINTER“ TYRES SPEED LIMIT– Switching on/off the relevant function(ON/OFF)– Setting the limit speed value among theavailable ones (160 km/h, 190 km/h
or 210 km/h)
PROGRAMMED MAINTENANCE– Displaying the expiry date of the next
car service check (strictly related to theProgrammed Maintenance Schedule)

60

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine– Switching on/off the relevant function(ON/OFF)
EXIT MENU– Exiting the menu
IMPORTANT The use of polarized glasses may reduce Infocenter display readability.

To make use of the information that the Infocenter display (with the key in the MAR position) is able to provide, you should first get familiar with the relevant control buttons (placed on the central console aside the climate control/ventilation controls and on top of the left
lever for the Trip computer function) and use them in accordance with the descriptions below. It is also recommended that you read over thischapter before performing any operation.

INFO, â,ãbuttons
Depending on the cases: to scroll the menu screens and their respective options
upwards or to increase the displayed value

A0A0013m+
INFO

A single press for less than 2 seconds (pulse), shown by ç in the following
screens, to confirm the desired option and/or switch to the next screen or access the menu-

A single press for more than 2 seconds, shown by é in the following screens,
to confirm the desired option and return to the previous screen

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARCONTROL BUTTONS (fig. 82-83)

Depending on the cases: to scroll the menu screens and their respective options
downwards or to decrease the displayed value

fig. 82

SET button

A0A0014m

ã

A single press for less than 2 seconds (pulse), shown by ä in the following
screens, to scroll the different Trip computer information screens
A single press for more than 2 seconds, shown by å in the following screens,
to reset the Trip computer information (reset) and initiate a new mission

fig. 83

61

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

MENU DESCRIPTION
The menu is made up of a set of functions arranged in a “circular fashion“, which can be selected by means of buttons â and ã, for access to the different select operations and settings (see the examples “LANGUAGE“ and “DATE“ in the table below); for further details, also
refer to “Access to the menu screen“ in the following pages.

ç

MENU OFF

Day

SPEED

Minutes

Month

Hour

Year

TRIP BçDEFAULT VALUESDATEINTENSITYLANGUAGEUNITSçSERVICE

EnglishDeutschWINTER TYRESBUZZER

Portoguese

62

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Italiano

Español
Français
Nederlands

By turning the ignition key to the MAR position, the Infocenter display will show the message CHECK ACTIVE: this indicates the start of thediagnosis phase for all the electronic systems available on the vehicle; this phase lasts a few seconds. If, during this phase, no anomaly isfound and after the engine has been started, the display will show the message CHECK OK.

If the display shows an anomaly message, see paragraph“Warning lights and indications“ in this chapter.

Is theenginestarted?

If nofailuresarepresent

YES

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

INITIAL CHECKNOorStandard screen display

continues on next page

63

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

continued from previous page
The Programmed Maintenance Schedule includes car maintenance every 20,000 km (or12,000 miles) or one year; this is shown automatically, with the ignition key at MAR, startingfrom 2,000 km (or 1,240 miles) or 30 day from this deadline and it is shown again every 200
km (or 124 miles) or 3 days. When a programmed maintenance interval (“coupon“) is near tocome, turning the ignition key to MAR, will display the message SCHEDULED SERVICE WITHIN
followed by the number of kilometers, days or miles to go before vehicle maintenance. The
PROGRAMMED MAINTENANCE message is displayed in km, mi or days, according to theapproaching service interval. At the very moment the value of 0 km, 0 miles or 0 days isreached, the display will show, every time the ignition key is turned to MAR, the message
SCHEDULED SERVICE EXPIRED, followed by the number of kilometers, miles or days. In thiscase, to reset this visual information contact Authorised Alfa Romeo Services.

64

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

After the INITIAL CHECK, it is possible to access the menu screen by pressing button ç.
To navigate use the â and ã buttons.

IMPORTANT If you access the Menu and no setting/adjustment is made within about 60 seconds, the system automatically leaves the
Menu and displays the screen previously set. In this case, the latest setting selected but not confirmed (by means of button ç) is not stored;
therefore, the operation must be performed again.
– When the car is running, only the short menu can be accessed (SPEED LIMIT setting).
– When the car is stopped, the extended menu can be accessed.
The following table gives the description of the cases provided.

ç

See
INITIAL CHECKIs the carmoving?

Example of standard
screenYES

Short menu screen

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

ACCESS TO THE MENU SCREEN

NO
SPEED
TRIP BDATELANGUAGEUNITS
BUZZERWINTER TYRESSERVICEINTENSITY
DEFAULT VALUESMENU OFF
Extended menu
screen65

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

SPEED LIMIT (SPEED)
With this function it is possible to set the car speed limit which, if exceeded, automatically sounds a buzzer and displays a specific message
to alert the driver. To set the limit speed, proceed as follows:
Return to previously
set screen, e.g.:

See INITIAL CHECK and
ACCESS TO THE MENU SCREENâã
Menu screen

â
ã

é
ç
Select, by means of buttons â o ã activation or deactivation(ON/OFF). The set option will be highlighted.

ç
é

ç
â
ã
66

Use the â and/or ã buttons to set the speed required. During the setting
operation, the value flashes on the screen. The possible setting is between 30
and 250 km/h or between 20 and 150 mph, depending on the unit set previously(see paragraph UNITS described later). Every press (pulse) of the button increases
or decreases by one unit. Keeping the button pressed obtains automatic
fast increase or decrease. When you are near the required setting,release the button and complete adjustment with single presses.

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engineéReturnto menu screenAs soon as the vehicle exceeds the set speed limit, the following display is shown automatically, together with the sounding of a buzzer.

Example of display when the set value is 120 km/h

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Speed limit exceeded indication

67

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

TRIP B ON/OFF (TRIP B)
With this option it is possible to turn ON or OFF the TRIP B function (partial trip) which displays the figures relating to: TRAVEL DISTANCE B, AVERAGE CONSUMPTION B, AVERAGE VELOCITY B, TRAVEL TIME B during a “partial mission“.

For further details, see “General Trip -Trip B“

See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREENâã
Menu screenéçReturn to previously
set screen, e.g.

â
ã

é
ç

Using the â or ã buttons choose activation
or deactivation ON/OFF.
The set option will be highlighted.

68

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Return to menu screen

To set the date (day - month - year) and the time (hours-minutes), proceed as follows:
See INITIAL CHECK
and ACCESS TO THE MENUâã
Menu screen

é
ç
â
ã

Return to previously
set screen, e.g.:

é
ç
â
ã

Menu screen Each press (pulse)on the â or ã buttons
increases or decreases
by one unit. Keeping thecorresponding button pressed
obtains automatic fast increaseor decrease. When you are near
the required value, release
the control and complete
adjustment by single presses.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARDATE SETTING/TIME SETTING (DATE)

é
ç
â
ã

é
ç

continues on next page

69

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

continued from previous page

â
ã

é
ç

Return to previously
set screen, e.g.:

â
ã

é
ç
Return to menu screen

Each press (pulse) on
the â or ã buttons
increases or decreases
by one unit. Keeping thecorresponding button pressed
obtains automatic fast increaseor decrease. When you are near
the required value, release
the control and complete
adjustment by single presses.

70

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

The messages shown on the display can be provided in several languages (Italian, German, English, Spanish, French, Dutch, Portuguese).
To select the required language, proceed as follows:

See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREENâã
Menu screenéçReturn to previously
set screen, e.g.

âã

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

LANGUAGE SELECTION (LANGUAGE)éç
Return to menu screen

71

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

UNITS SELECTION (UNITS)
The display provides information in relation to the unit of measure set. To choose the units, proceed as follows:
Return to previously
set screen, e.g.

See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREENâã
Menu screen

é
ç

é
â
ã

ç
â
ã

é
ç
â
ã

é
ç

Return to menu screen

72

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

The volume of the buzzer that signals any failure or warning to the driver can be adjusted according to a pre-set scale using the â and/or

ã buttons. To switch OFF or adjust, proceed as follows:

See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREENâã
Menu screenéçReturn to previously
set screen, e.g.

âã

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

IMPORTANT/FAILURE BUZZER VOLUME SETTING (BUZZER)éçReturn to menu screen

73

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR“WINTER“ TYRES SPEED LIMIT (WINTER TYRES)With this function it is possible to set the speed limit when travelling with winter tyres. The speed limit can be chosen between: 160 km/h,
190 km/h or 210 km/h (see paragraph “Winter tyres“ in section “Correct use of the car“).

Return to previously
set screen, e.g.

See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREEN

é
ç

â
ã

Return tomenu screen

Menu
screenâãSelect, by means of buttons â or ã activation or deactivation(ON/OFF). The set option will be highlighted.

ç
é

ç
é
74

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREEN

With the SERVICE function it is possible to receive information connected with correct vehicle maintenance. To consult this function, proceed as follows:

â
ã

â
ã

â
ã

ç
Menu screenã â

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

PROGRAMMED MAINTENANCE (SERVICE)

â ã
ã
ã
â

ã
â

â

ç
Return to menu screen

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engineéReturn to previously
set screen, e.g.

75

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

IMPORTANT Products shown in the SERVICE screen and to be used for scheduled maintenance could be subject to modifications. Refer toparagraph "Fluids and lubricants" in section "Technical specifications".

The Programmed Maintenance Schedule includes vehicle
maintenance every 20,000 km (or 12,000 miles) or one year; thisis shown automatically, with the ignition key at MAR, startingfrom 2,000 km (or 1,240 miles) or 30 day from this deadline andit is shown again every 200 km (or 124 miles) or 3 days. When aprogrammed maintenance interval (“coupon“) is near to come, turning the ignition key toMAR, will display the message SCHEDULED SERVICE WITHIN followed by the number ofkilometers, days or miles to go before vehicle maintenance. The PROGRAMMEDMAINTENANCE message is displayed in km, mi or days, according to the approaching service
interval. At the very moment the value of 0 km, 0 miles or 0 days is reached, the display
will show, every time the ignition key is turned to MAR, the message SCHEDULED SERVICEEXPIRED, followed by the number of kilometers, miles or days. In this case, to reset thisvisual information contact Authorised Alfa Romeo Services).

76

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

This function allows to adjust the Infocenter display intensity (dimming/brightening).
To perform the adjustment, proceed as follows:

See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREENâã
Menu screenéçReturn to previously
set screen , e.g.

âã

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARDISPLAY CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT (INTENSITY)éçReturn to menu screen

77

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR“DEFAULT“ VALUES RESET (DEFAULT VALUES)
The following function:– If ON restores: Speed limit, Trip B, Light rheostat, Language, Temperature unit, km/mi unit, Consumption unit, Buzzer, Winter tires, Contrast, with the following values Speed limit = 120 km/h, Trip B ON, Light rheostat ON = 4, Light rheostat OFF = 1, Language = Italian, Temperature unit = °C, Distance unit = km, Consumption unit = l/100 km, Buzzer = 2, Winter tires OFF (value set at 160 km/h), contrast value = 3– If OFF, the above parameter values can be set manually

See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREENâã
Menu screenéçReturn to previously
set screen, e.g.

â
ã

é
ç
Return to menu screen

78

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

EXIT MENU (MENU OFF)
With this function it is possible to exit the setup menu and return to the previously set screen.

See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREENâãç
Menu screen

Return to previously
set screen, e.g.

79

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

GENERAL TRIP - TRIP B
The TRIP COMPUTER function gives information relating to the operating status of the vehicle on the Infocenter display. This function comprises
the GENERAL TRIP concerning the complete mission of the car and TRIP B concerning the partial car mission. This function (as shown in thegraph below) is contained within the complete mission. Both functions are resettable.
The GENERAL TRIP displays the figures relating to RANGE, TRAVEL DISTANCE, AVERAGE CONSUMPTION, ACTUAL CONSUMPTION, AVERAGE VELOCITY, TRAVELTIME (complete mission time), ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE.
The TRIP B (with automatic reset each time at least 2 hours have passed since stopping the engine), displays information concerning TRAVELDISTANCE B, AVERAGE CONSUMPTION B, AVERAGE VELOCITY B, TRAVEL TIME B (partial mission time).
Start of journey procedure (reset)
To start a new journey monitored by the GENERAL TRIP, with the ignition key at MAR, press the button ã with å (see “Control buttons“).
Reset GENERAL TRIP
End of complete mission
Start of new mission

Reset GENERAL TRIP
End of complete mission
Start of new mission˙˙

GENERAL TRIP
Reset TRIP B

˙

End of partial mission
Start of new partial mission

80

˙

TRIP BEnd of partial mission
Start of new partial mission

˙˙

Reset TRIP B

TRIP B˙

Reset TRIP B
End of partial mission
Start of new partial mission

˙

TRIP B

Reset TRIP B
End of partial mission
Start of new partial mission

The reset operation (pressing the å button) in the presence of the screens concerning the GENERAL TRIP also makes it possible to reset
TRIP B. The reset operation (pressing the å button) in the presence of only the screens concerning TRIP B makes it possible to reset only the
information associated with this function.
IMPORTANT The RANGE and ACTUAL CONSUMPTION information cannot be reset.

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

The TRIP COMPUTER information is displayed in sequence according to the table below.

Continues onnext pageSee INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREEN

ä

ä

å

ä

å

ä

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

IMPORTANT At the beginning of a new mission, due to battery reconnection, the average consumption value is initialised to the “average predefined standard consumption“ equal to 12 l/100 km.

Previously set
screen; e.g.

ä

ä

ä

å

å

ä

å

Reset GENERAL TRIP and TRIP B,
excluding Range and Actual Consumption(see next paragraph RESET GENERAL TRIP)

81

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Return to previously
set screen, e.g.:Continued fromprevious page

TRIP B ON?

NO

YES

ä

ä

ä

å

å

å

å

Reset TRIP B (see next paragraph
RESET TRIP B)

âIMPORTANT Pressing the
button returns
automatically to the standard screen

82

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engineäåReset GENERAL TRIP

Reset TRIP B

å= Reset GENERAL TRIP and TRIP B(excluding Range and Actual Consumption)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

After resetting TRIP by pressing the button with å mode, the display will show the following functions:

å = Reset TRIP B

83

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

RANGE = This shows the distance (in km or miles) the car can still cover before needing fuel if keeping the same driving conditions. The
display will show “----“ after the following events:A) range values lower than 50 km (approx. 31 miles) (after the reduced range warning message)B) Parking with running engine or car speed lower than 4 km/h for over 5 minutes.
TRAVEL DISTANCE = This shows the distance traveled by the car from the start of the new mission (*).
AVERAGE CONSUMPTION = This shows the average actual consumption in l/km or in l/100km depending on the unit selected.
ACTUAL CONSUMPTION = This shows the consumption of the car updated every 5 sec. approx. If parking with running engine or incase of speed values lower than 4 km/h the display will show “----“. Actual consumption calculation algorithm, according to the above procedure, restarts as soon as the car speed will be equal to or higher than 4 km/h.
AVERAGE VELOCITY = This shows the average speed of the car as a function of the overall travel time elapsed from the start of the
new mission (*)
TRAVELTIME = time elapsed from the start of the new mission (*)(*) NEW MISSION: this takes place when performing the “manual“ reset by pressing the dedicated button.
IMPORTANT GENERAL TRIP is reset automatically when the Distance Traveled is equal to 9999,9 km (or mi), when Travel Time is 99:59(99 hours and 59 minutes) or after reconnecting the battery.
IMPORTANT If no information is available, all the TRIP COMPUTER parameters display the message “****“ instead of a value, together
with the typical description of each parameter. When the normal operation condition is resumed, the count of the various parameters starts
again normally, with no reset of the values displayed prior to the failure, nor the start of a new mission.

84

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GENERAL WARNING
The failure indications shown on the Infocenter display, together with the buzzer (adjustable) and the turning on of the relevant warning light (if available), are accompanied by specific warning messages (e.g. “Go to dealer“, “Switch off eng., do not proceed“, etc…).
These warnings are concise and precautionary and are intended to suggest the prompt action that the driver should take when afailure occurs. However, these warnings are not to be considered exhaustive and/or alternative to the prescriptions of this Owner’s Manual,
which must always be read over carefully. When an anomaly occurs always refer to the contents of this chapter.
IMPORTANT When an anomaly occurs, the Infocenter display reaches its maximum brightness. By pressing button â the warning messages disappear and the symbol referring to the failure warning is reduced to an icon in the right bottom area of the display.
IMPORTANT The anomaly warnings that appear on the Infocenter display are divided into two categories: very serious and serious anomalies. Very serious anomalies are displayed indefinitely, by interrupting any message previously shown on the display, and are proposed again
every time the ignition key is turned to MAR, until the malfunction is eliminated. Moreover, the “cycle“ can be interrupted by pressing button â: in this case, the symbol referring to the anomaly will be shown in the right bottom area of the display until the malfunction is eliminated.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNING LIGHTS AND INDICATIONS

Serious anomalies are displayed for about 20 seconds and then disappear, but they are proposed again every time the ignition key in turned
to MAR. At the end of the display cycle, equal to about 20 seconds, or when button â, is pressed, the symbol referring to the anomaly will
be shown in the right bottom area of the display until the malfunction is eliminated.

85

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Warning lightx

Messageon display

LOW BRAKE FLUID AND/OR HANDBRAKE ON
When the ignition key is turned to MAR, the warning light on the dial comes on but must go out
after a few seconds.
The warning light comes on (together with the message + symbol shown on the display) when
the level of the brake fluid inside the tank falls below the minimum, due to a possible leak in thecircuit and with the car moving.
WARNING
If the warning light x comes on when travelling (together with themessage on the display), check that the handbrake is not engaged.
If the warning light stays on with the handbrake off (together with the message on the display), stop immediately and contact Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services.

d

BRAKE PAD WEAR
The warning light on the dial comes on (together with the message + symbol shown on the display) when the front brake pads are worn; in this case, have them replaced as soon as possible.
IMPORTANT As the car is fitted with wear sensors for the front brake pads, when replacing them,also check the rear brake pads.

86

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engineçMessageon display

HIGH ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATUREWARNING
When the engine is very hot, do not remove the tank cap: dangerof burns.
When the ignition key is turned to MAR, the warning light comes on but must go out after a
few seconds.
The engine coolant temperature warning light comes on (together with the message + symbol
shown on the display) when the engine is overheated.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Warning light

If the warning light comes on, proceed as follows:– Normal driving conditions: stop the car, switch the engine off and check if the water level inside the tank is not below the reference mark MIN.
In this case, wait a few minutes to let the engine cool down, then open the cap slowly and carefully, fill with coolant, making sure its level is between reference marks MIN and MAX on thetank. Moreover, perform a visual check for any fluid leakage. If the warning light comes on again
the next time the engine is started, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
– Car heavy duty (e.g. towing a trailer uphill or car fully loaded): slow down and, if the warning light stays on, stop the car. Pause for 2 or 3 minutes, keeping the engine on and slightly accelerated to facilitate better coolant circulation, then switch the engine off.
Check correct fluid level, as described above.
IMPORTANT In case of highly demanding use of the car, you are recommended to keep theengine on and slightly accelerated for a few minutes before switching it off.

87

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Warning light¬

Messageon display

AIR BAG FAILURE
When the ignition key is turned to MAR, the warning light on the check panel comes on, but mustgo out after a few seconds. This warning light will come on glowing steadily if there is an operating
failure in the Air bag system.
WARNING
If the ¬ warning light does not turn on when turning the ignition key to MAR
or if it stays on when travelling, this could indicate a failure in safety retaining
systems; under this condition air bags or pretensioners could not trigger in the event ofcollision or, in a restricted number of cases, they could trigger accidentally. Stop the car
and contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to have the system checked immediately.

WARNING
The failure of the warning light ¬ (warning light off) is also indicated by
the flashing of the passenger’s front Air bag deactivated warning light F
for more than the normal seconds.

F

PASSENGER’S FRONT AIR BAG DEACTIVATED
The check panel warning light F turns on when the passenger’s front Air bag is deactivated by meansof the relevant key switch. With the passenger’s front Air bag activated, turning the ignition key to MAR,the warning light on the check panel comes on but must go out after approx. 4 seconds.
WARNING
Warning light F indicates also warning light ¬ failure. This is indicated byintermittent flashing, over 4 seconds, of warning light F. In this event, warning light ¬ could be not up to indicate restraint system failures, if any. Stop the car andcontact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to have the system checked immediately.

88

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Messageon display

LOW OIL PRESSUREv

When the ignition key is turned to MAR, the warning light on the check panel comes on but
must go out as soon as the engine is started.
WARNING
If the warning light v comes on when travelling (together withthe message + symbol shown on the display), switch the engine off
immediately and contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

w<

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Warning light

LOW BATTERY CHARGE
When the ignition key is turned to MAR, the warning light on the check panel comes on, but mustgo out as soon as the engine is started (a slight delay is permitted when the engine is running atidle). It if stays on, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services immediately.

SEAT BELTS NOT FASTENED
The warning light on the check panel will turn on for some seconds when, with the ignition key atMAR, the driver’s seat belt is not fastened properly.

89

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Warning light

Messageon display

INCOMPLETE DOOR CLOSINGThe message + symbol shown on the display will appear when one or more doors or the tailgate
are not properly shut.

90

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

U

Messageon display

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM (EOBD) FAILURE
In normal conditions, turning the ignition key to MAR, the dial warning light turns on but it should
go off when the engine has started. The initial turning on indicates that the warning light is working properly.
If the warning light stays on or turns on (together with the message + symbol shown on the display) when travelling:glowing steadily - indicates a fault in the supply/ignition system which could cause high exhaust emissions, possible lack of performance, poor handling and high consumption levels.
In these conditions, it is possible to continue driving without however demanding heavy effort orhigh speeds. Prolonged use of the car with the warning light on may cause damage. Contact an Alfa Romeo Authorized Service as soon as possible.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Warning light

The warning light turns off if the fault disappears, but it is still stored by the system;
flashing - indicates that the catalyst could be damaged (see paragraph on “EOBD system“ in thischapter).
If the warning light flashes, it is necessary to release the accelerator pedal to lower the speed until the warning light stops flashing; continue travelling at moderate speed trying to avoid driving
conditions that could cause the warning light to flash again. Contact an Alfa Romeo Authorized Service as soon as possible.
If, when turning the ignition key to MAR, the warning light U does
not switch on or if it turns on glowing steadily or flashing when travelling, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Service as soon as possible. The
operation of the warning light U can be checked by traffic agents by proper
equipment, therefore comply with the regulations in force in the country where
you are driving.

91

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Warning light¢

Messageon display

ALFA ROMEO CODE SYSTEM
When the ignition key is turned to MAR the warning light on the check panel should flash only
once and then go out. If the warning light stays on with the key at MAR, this indicates a possible
failure: see “Alfa Romeo CODE system“.
IMPORTANT The turning on at the same time of U and ¢ warning lights indicates a failureof the Alfa Romeo CODE System.
If with the engine running, the ¢ warning light flashes, this means that the car is not protectedby the engine inhibitor device (see “Alfa Romeo CODE system“ in this chapter). Contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services to have all the keys memorised.

INERTIAL FUEL CUT-OFF SWITCH
The message + symbol are shown on the display when the fuel cut-off switch comes into operation.
WARNINGIf, after the message has been displayed, you can smell fuel or notice leaks from the supply system, do not re-engage the switch to
avoid the risk of fire.

92

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

>Messageon display

INEFFICIENT ABS SYSTEM
When the ignition key is turned to MAR, the warning light comes on but must go out after a
few seconds.
This warning light comes on (together with the message + symbol on the display) when the system is inefficient. In this case, normal braking is ensured, though without making use of the ABS
system. Caution is recommended, especially in cases of less than perfect grip. In any case, contact
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services as soon as possible.

x

Inefficient EBD electronic braking distributor+>

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Warning light

WARNINGThe vehicle is equipped with an electronic braking distributor (EBD).
Simultaneous lighting of dial warning lights > and x (together withthe message + symbol on the display) with the engine running indicates an
EBD system failure; in this case, any sudden braking action can cause earlylocking of rear wheels, with possible sideslip. Drive very carefully and go immediately to the nearest Alfa Romeo Authorized Service to have the system checked.

93

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Warning lightV

Messageon display

ASR – WHEEL ANTISKID SYSTEM
Turning the ignition key to MAR, the warning light on the dial turns on, but should go off after a
few seconds. The warning light turns on together with the led on the ASR OFF button when thesystem is switched off by the drivers. The warning light flashes when the system cuts in, to alert
the driver that the system is adapting to the road surface grip conditions.
If the drivers doesn’t switch off the system, the turning on of the warning light, together with themessage (ASR OFF) on the display, indicates a failure of the ASR system. In this case contact Alfa
Romeo Authorised Services as soon as possible.

W

OUTSIDE LIGHT FAILURE
When the ignition key is turned to MAR, the dial warning light comes on but must go out aftera few seconds.
The warning light comes on when an anomaly is found in one of the following lights:– sidelights– braking lights or corresponding fuse– rear fog guards– number plate lights.
The warning of a fault may mean one or more blown bulbs, a burnt fuse or cut off connection.

94

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engineçMessageon display

FUEL RESERVE
The warning light comes on when about 7 litres of fuel are left in the tank, and when the car
range is below 50 km.

REDUCED RANGEThis message is displayed when the car range is below 50 km.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Warning light

SPEED LIMIT EXCEEDEDThe message + symbol turn on, together with the sound of the buzzer, on the display when thevehicle exceeds the speed limit set previously (see “Speed limit“ in this section).

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
This message appears on the display 2,000 kilometres from the deadline given in the Scheduled
Maintenance Programme (every 20,000 km) and it is shown again at timed intervals, turning theignition key to MAR every 200 km.

95

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Warning light

4
5
R
E

Messageon display

REAR FOG GUARDS
This warning light comes on when the rear fog guards are turned on.

FRONT FOG LIGHTSThis warning light comes on when the front fog lights are turned on.

LEFT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR (INTERMITTENT)This warning light comes on when the control lever is moved downwards or, together with righthand indicator, when the hazard warning lights are switched on.

RIGHT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR (INTERMITTENT)This warning light comes on when the control lever is moved upwards or, together with the left-hand
indicator, when the hazard warning lights are switched on.

96

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3

Ü
1

l

Messageon display

SIDELIGHTS AND DIPPED-BEAM HEADLIGHTS
The warning light on the dial comes on when the sidelights or dipped-beam headlights are switchedon.

CONSTANT SPEED ADJUSTMENT (CRUISE CONTROL) (where applicable)
The warning light on the check panel turns on, with the knurled ring of the cruise control in the
ON position, when the device starts to intervene on the engine.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Warning light

MAIN-BEAM HEADLIGHTS
The warning light comes on when these lights are turned on.

DIRECTION INDICATORS IF A TRAILER IS TOWEDThe warning light on the dial comes on when the direction indicator control lever is moved up or
down, or when the hazard warning light button is pressed.

POSSIBLE PRESENCE OF ICE ON THE ROAD
The message + symbol are shown on the display, and the buzzer sounds, when the outside temperature reaches or falls below 3°C to warn the driver of possible presence of ice on the road.

97

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Warning lightt

Messageon display

SELESPEED GEARBOX FAILURE
Turning the ignition key to MAR, the warning light on the cluster shall come on and then go off
after about 4 seconds.
If the warning light stays on, it indicates that a fault has been detected in the Selespeed gearbox;
at the same time, the buzzer beeps intermittently for 4 seconds to draw the attention of the driver.
Contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services as soon as possible to remove the fault.

t

Q-SYSTEM AUTOMATIC GEARBOX FAILURE
Turning the ignition key to MAR, the warning light on the cluster shall come on and then go off
after about 4 seconds.
If the warning light stays on or turns on when travelling, it indicates overheated gearbox oil (glowing steadily) or a gearbox fault (flashing).
Warning light glowing steadily: it indicates that the gearbox oil has reached the maximum
established temperature. To make oil cooling down, stop the car, move the lever to P or N and let
the engine idle until the warning light goes out. Resume driving without demanding high performancefrom the engine. If the warning light comes on again, it is necessary to stop again with the engine
idling until it goes out again. If the interval between one lighting up of the warning light and next isbelow 15 minutes, you are advised to stop the car, turn the engine off and wait for the engine-gearbox unit to cool down completely. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services as soon as possible.

98

Warning light flashing: it indicates a fault in the automatic gearbox. The automatic control
system provides an emergency programme. Under these circumstances, you are advised to stop
the car and turn the engine off; in fact, the next time the engine is started, the self-diagnostic system could cut off the fault which will however be memorised. Conversely, if the fault remains(warning light flashing), it is necessary to select the gears manually as if driving a car with mechanicalgearbox, bearing in mind that the only two speeds available are the 2nd and 4th gear. Contact Alfa
Romeo Authorised Services as soon as possible.

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

A0A0359m

fig. 84
1 Central defrosting/demisting vents for windscreen - 2 Adjustable upper side vents - 3 Defrosting/demisting vents for side windows 4 Adjustable side air outlets - 5 Adjustable upper vent - 6 Adjustable centre, swivel vents - 7 Front feet area fixed vents - 8 Rear feet area
fixed vents - 9 Rear adjustable swivel outlets.

99

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

UPPER VENT ADJUSTMENT(fig. 85)

CENTRE VENT ADJUSTMENT(fig. 86)

UPPER SIDE VENTADJUSTMENT (fig. 87)

The vent has an opening/closing control.

Each vent has a lever which makes it possible to direct the flow of air towards thepassengers in an horizontal direction. To adjust the air flow, use the opening/closing
control.

On the dashboard ends are adjustable
vents (A) for car interior, and fixed defrosting/demisting vents (B) for side windows.

closed.
•) == Completely
Completely open.

•( = Completely open.

= Completely closed.

A0B0015m

100

fig. 85

closed.
•) == Completely
Completely open.

A0B0037m

fig. 86

A0B0039m

fig. 87

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Air flow can be adjusted by means of theknob (C).

Air flow can be adjusted by means of vanes(A) with press-on opening and closing.

Fig. 88: front seats (on dashboard ends)

Air flow can be directed by rotating the outlet by means of the vanes.

Fig. 89: rear seat (on the console between seats)

AUTOMATIC TWOZONE CLIMATECONTROL SYSTEM
To start the system:– turn the knob rings to set the required
temperatures (driver’s side – passenger’sside).
– press the AUTO (fig. 90) button.
IMPORTANT The climate control system makes it possible to adjust the temperatures required for the two sides with amaximum difference of 7°C between thedriver’s and the passenger’s sides.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARREAR SWIVELOUTLET ADJUSTMENTIMPORTANT The climate control compressor works only when the engine is running and the outside temperature is morethan 2°C.
A0B0038m

fig. 88

A0B0289m

101

fig. 89

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNING
The climate control compressor cannot work when
the outside temperature is lessthan 2°C. Therefore, it is recommended that the internal air recirculation function v is not used
when the outside temperature islow, as the windows could mist

The coolant used for the
climate control system is
R134a which meets current regulations and does not harmthe environment in the event of accidental spillage.
Absolutely avoid the use of other fluids which are incompatible
with the system components.

fig. 90

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

The car is equipped with a two-zone climate control system, controlled by an electronic control unit which makes it possible
to separately adjust the air temperature on
the driver’s side and on the passenger’s side.
To obtain optimum temperature control in
the two areas of the passenger compartment, the system has an outside sensor, apassenger compartment sensor and a twozone sun ray sensor.
The system is integrated with an incipient
misting sensor installed behind the internal
rearview mirror, which is able to “monitor“
a predefined area of the windscreen innersurface which can automatically act on thesystem to prevent or reduce misting, througha series of operations such as: opening air
recirculation, enabling compressor, air flow
to the windscreen, fan speed sufficient fordemisting; and, in case of heavy misting,enabling the MAX-DEF function.

For more detailed information on the system and how to make the best use of it,read the instructions given in the following
pages.

A0B0382m

102

GENERAL

IMPORTANT The demisting procedure
is enabled every time the ignition key isturned to MAR, or pressing the AUTO button. When this procedure is working it canbe turned off pressing one of the following
buttons: compressor, air recirculation, air distribution, air flow. This operation inhibits theincipient misting sensor signal until the
AUTO button is pressed again or the nexttime the ignition key is turned to MAR.
The system is integrated by an anti-pollution sensor that is able to switch on the inside air recirculation function automatically, to reduce the unpleasant smell of polluted
air when driving in urban areas, queues, tunnels, and when the windscreen wash/wiper
is operated (with the typical smell of spirits).

IMPORTANT The function of the antipollution sensor is subordinate to safety conditions; therefore disabling the climate control compressor or at an outside temperature
below 4°C, the sensor is disabled. In any
case, the sensor can be re-enabled pressing the recirculation button vuntil taking
it to the automatic mode.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

To ensure correct operation of the incipient misting
sensor, stickers (e.g. roadlicence holder) must not be appliedin the “control“ area between thesensor and the windscreen. For thisvery reason, both the sensor andthe windscreen must always be
kept clean, to avoid accumulationof dirt or other substances.

The anti-pollution sensor
is placed in the air flow infront of the combined particle activated carbon filter and,
therefore, must be protectedagainst possible compressed air
jets produced by cleaning equipment. Moreover, the water collected from the windscreen wipers
should not come into contact withthe sensor: otherwise, the internal
air recirculation function could bedisabled for long periods.

103

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

The air quality control is also entrusted to
a combined particle and activated carbon filter.
The climate control system automaticallycontrols and adjusts the following parameters and functions:– temperature of the air admitted to thepassenger compartment (for the driver’s andpassenger’s side separately)– fan speed– air distribution– inside air recirculation on/off– climate control compressor on/off enable.

The settings of the following functions canbe modified manually:– fan speed– air distribution– inside air recirculation on/off– climate control compressor on/off enable.
– window defrosting/demisting
The control of the functions that have notbeen modified manually will always be automatic and, in any case, the temperatureof the air flowing into the passenger compartment is controlled automatically depending on the temperatures set on the driver’s and passenger’s displays.

104

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

IMPORTANT Manual selections prevailover automatic ones and remain in storage
until the user decides to resume automatic
control. The settings selected manually are
stored when the engine is switched off andresumed the next time the engine is started.

1 - Inside temperature adjustment knob
(driver’s side)
2 - Inside temperature set display (driver’sside)
3 - Knob for adjusting the fan speed andswitching the system off

10 - Maximum defrosting/demisting
on/off button for windscreen and front side
windows, rearscreen heating and wing mirror coils (function MAX-DEF - -)11 - Button for aligning the temperature
set on the passenger’s side with that on thedriver’s side MONO

12 - Climate control compressor on/off
enable button √13 - Inside air temperature sensor
14 - Button for selecting the system automatic mode AUTO

4 - Fan speed set, air distribution and system off display (OFF)A0B0056m

5 - Inside temperature set display (passenger’s side)
6 - Inside temperature adjustment knob
(passenger’s side)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARCONTROLS (fig. 91)

7 - Inside air recirculation on/off buttonv (manual/automatic)
8 - Air distribution selection button
9 - Rearscreen heating and wing mirror defrosting on/off button (105

fig. 91

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

HOW TO USE THE AUTOMATIC
TWO-ZONE CLIMATE CONTROL(fig. 91)
IMPORTANT The knob rings are not provided with automatic stopper; therefore,
they are free to rotate in both directions once
they have reached the maximum or minimum values.
The system can be started in different
ways, but it is recommended that the required temperatures are set on the displays;then, press (14) AUTO button.
Thus, the system will start operating fully
automatic, to reach the set temperaturesin the shortest possible time and keep them.
During the fully automatic operation of thesystem, the set temperatures can however
be modified at any time: the system will automatically modify its own settings to adapt
itself to the new requirements.

IMPORTANT The temperature difference between the driver’s and the passenger’s sides must not be greater than 7°C
in order to be accepted by the system.
The selections made by the system in automatic mode can be customized by manually acting on the following controls:– fan speed adjustment knob (3)– air distribution selection button (8)– inside air recirculation on/off button (7)v– climate control compressor on enablebutton (12) √.
Manually selecting one or more of thesefunctions turns off the right led on the button (14) AUTO.

106

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

With one or more functions switched on
manually, the temperature control for the air
admitted to the passenger compartment willin any case continue to be monitored automatically by the system (left led on button
14 AUTO on), except with the climate control compressor off.
In fact, in this condition, the temperatureof the air admitted into the passenger compartment cannot be lower than the outside
air temperature; this condition is indicatedby the turning off of the two leds on button (14) AUTO and flashing on the display(2) and/or (5) related with the temperature rate that cannot be obtained.

A0B0063m

Turning the rings of knobs (1 or 6) clockwise or counterclockwise, respectively highers or lowers the temperature of the air required in the left zone (knob 1) or rightzone (knob 6) of the passenger compartment. The temperatures set are shown on
the displays (2) and (5) placed below therespective knobs.
Separate operation of the temperatures set
is restored automatically using knob (6) isactuated.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

AIR TEMPERATURE
ADJUSTMENT KNOBS (fig. 92)

Turning the knob rings clockwise or counterclockwise, until they reach the extreme
selection positions HI or LO, will cause themaximum heating or cooling functions, respectively, to be switched on:

fig. 92

107

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

A0B0064m

HI function(highest heating power - fig. 93)
It is switched on by setting a temperatureof more than 32.5°C on the display, andcan be switched on independently from thedriver’s or passenger’s side, or both of them;this setting brings the system to the “onezone” mode and is shown by both displays.
This functions can be switched on when
you wish to heat the passenger compartment as quickly as possible, by taking thegreatest advantage from the system potential.
The function uses the maximum temperature of the heating fluid, whereas air distribution to feet and 5th fan speed.
With the function switched on, however,
all the manual settings can be made.
fig. 93

To switch the function off, you only needto turn the ring of a knob (1) or (6) of thetemperature set to a value lower than
32.5°C; the opposite display will show
32.5°C.

108

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

By pressing button (14) AUTO, the display
indicates a temperature of 32.5°C and falls
within an operating condition with automatic temperature control.

It is switched on by setting a temperature
lower than 16.5°C on the display; this setting is shown by both displays.
This function can be switched on when you
wish to cool the passenger compartment as
quickly as possible, by taking the greatest
advantage from the system potential.
The function cuts off air heating, switches on both internal air recirculation (to prevent hot air from entering the compartment)
and the climate control compressor, brings
air distribution to E and 5th fan speed.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

A0B0065m

LO function(highest cooling power - fig. 94)

With the function switched on, however,
all the manual settings can be made.
To switch the function off, you only needto turn the ring of a knob (1) or (6) of thetemperature set to a value greater than
16.5°C; the opposite display will show
16.5°C.

fig. 94

By pressing button (14) AUTO the display
indicates a temperature of 16.5°C and falls
within an operating condition with automatic
temperature control.

109

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

MONO BUTTON FOR
ALIGNMENT OF THE
TEMPERATURES SET (fig. 95)

A0B0066m

By pressing button (11) MONO the passenger’s side temperature automaticallyaligns with that on the driver’s side and,
therefore, the same temperature can be set
for both areas by simply turning the ring ofknob (1), on driver’s side.
This function is provided to facilitate temperature adjustment inside the entire passenger compartment when only the driveris on board.
Separate operation of set temperatures is
automatically restored when the passenger
operates the ring of knob (6) or by pressing button (11) MONO.

fig. 95

110

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0B0067m

Turning the ring of knob (3), clockwise
or counterclockwise will cause the fan speed- and, therefore, the amount of air flowing
into the passenger compartment - to increase or decrease, respectively; the 16
speeds that can be selected are displayed
by a bar (every 3 clicks), up to a maximumof 6 illuminated bars:– max. fan speed = all bars lit;
– min. fan speed = one bar lit.
The fan can be cut off (all bars off) only
if the climate control compressor has beenswitched off by pressing button (12) √.
To resume automatic fan speed control after a manual setting has been made, press
button (14) AUTO. By fully turning the ringof knob (3) counterclockwise, the system
will be turned off, with the following situation: display (2) OFF; display (5) OFF; central display (4) OFF and left-hand led available on internal air recirculation button (7)v ON and both led on AUTO button OFF.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

FAN SPEED ADJUSTMENTKNOB (fig. 96-97)

fig. 96
IMPORTANT By pressing the internal
air recirculation button (7) v, it is possible to let external fresh air into the passenger compartment.

111

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

To turn the system on again, you only needto turn the ring of knob (3) clockwise, orpress any button, except the internal air recirculation button (7) and rear window
heater button (9); this operation resumes
all the operating conditions previously stored
in the memory.

A0B0068m

IMPORTANT After exiting the condition

OFF, the internal air recirculation v is re-

sumed to the condition preceding the switching off.

fig. 97

112

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0B0069m

By pressing button MODE (8) repeatedly,
you can manually choose one of the five possible modes:
E

Flow of air to the dashboard centre
and side outlets and rear outlet.

E Splitting of the air flow between the
Z vents to the lower part of the passenger compartment (warmest air)and the dashboard centre and side outlets and the rear outlet (coolest air).
This air flow distribution is particularly useful in spring and autumn, when
the sun is shining.
Z Air flow towards the front and rear
lower part of the passenger compartment. Due to the natural tendency ofheat to spread upwards, this type of
distribution allows heating of the passenger compartment in the shortest
time, also giving a prompt feeling ofwarmth to the coldest parts of thebody.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

AIR DISTRIBUTIONSELECTION BUTTON (fig. 98)

fig. 98
Q Splitting of the air flow between the
Z windscreen and side window defrosting/demisting vents and the lower
part of the passenger compartment.
This type of air distribution allows satisfactory heating of the passenger
compartment while preventing possible misting of the windows.

Q Air flow to the windscreen and front
side window vents to demist or defrost them.
To resume automatic air distribution control
after a manual selection, press button (14)
AUTO.

113

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

CLIMATE CONTROLCOMPRESSOR ON/OFF
ENABLE BUTTON(fig. 99)

A0B0070m√

Pressing button (12) √ enables the turning on of the climate control compressor.
This condition is shown by the lighting up of
the led placed on the button itself.
When the climate control compressor isturned off, the leds on buttons (14) AUTO
and (12) √ go off; automatic inside air recirculation control is also excluded (both leds
off on button 7 v) which always stays
off to prevent window misting; in any case,the automatic operation of inside air recirculation can be resumed (though it is notrecommended) by pressing button 7 v.

fig. 99

114

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0B0071m

The switching off of the climate control
compressor remains in storage even whenthe engine has been stopped. To resume automatic control for switching on the climate
control compressor, press button (12) √again, the button led will turn on, or press
button (14) AUTO; in which case, the other manual settings set will be cancelled.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

When the climate control compressor is off,
it is not possible to admit air to the passenger compartment with a temperature below the outside temperature; in this case,the value flashes on the display concerning
the temperature that cannot be reached andthe left led on button (14 AUTO - fig.
100) goes off.

fig. 100WARNING
Operation of the climate
control compressor is necessary for cooling and dehumidifying the air; it is advisable to keep
this function always on, to prevent
window misting problems.

115

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

INSIDE AIR RECIRCULATION
ON/OFF BUTTON v(fig. 101)

A0B0072m

Inside air recirculation is controlled according to three operating logics:– automatic control, indicated by the turning on of the right led on the button;– forced switching on (inside air recirculation always on), indicated by the turning
on of the left led on the button (and by theright led going off at the same time);– forced switching off (inside air recirculation always off, with air inlet from the outside), indicated by the turning off of both
leds.
These operating conditions are obtainedby pressing in sequence the inside air recirculation button (7) v.
When inside air recirculation is controlled
automatically by the system, the right led
on the air recirculation button (7) v
stays on all the time and the left led shows
the air recirculation condition:
ON = air recirculation operating;OFF = air recirculation off.

fig. 101
If inside air recirculation has been switchedon or off manually, the led on button (14)
AUTO turns off.
In automatic operation, inside air recirculation is switched on automatically when theanti-pollution sensor detects the presence of116

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

polluted air, for instance in cities, queues,
tunnels, and when the windscreen
wash/wiper is operated (with the characteristic smell of spirit).

WARNING
The inside air recirculation
function makes it possible
to reach the required “heating“ or“cooling“, conditions faster. It is
however inadvisable to use it on
rainy/cold days as it would considerably increase the possibility of
the windows misting inside, especially if the climate control system
is off.

WARNING
In certain weather conditions (e.g. outside temperature around 0°C) and with automatic air recirculation control on,
mist may form on the windows. In
this case press the inside air recirculation button (7) v, to switch
off recirculation (leds on button off)
and if necessary increase the flowof air to the windscreen.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNING
With the outside temperature below 2°C the climate control compressor is unable
to work. It is therefore inadvisable
to use the inside air recirculation
function v with low outside temperature as windows may mist
over quickly.

WARNING
It is advisable to turn on
the inside air recirculation
system in queues or tunnels to
avoid admitting polluted air fromoutside. The prolonged use of thisfunction should however be avoided, especially with several persons
on board, to avoid the possibilityof the windows misting inside.

117

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

BUTTON AUTO AUTOMATIC
OPERATION (fig. 102)

A0B0073m

When button (14) AUTO is pressed, thesystem automatically regulates the amountand distribution of the air admitted into thepassenger compartment, clearing all the previous manual settings.
This condition is indicated by the lighting ofboth button leds.
When the right led, on button (14) AUTO, is OFF, it indicates that one or several
manual operations have been carried out
and, therefore, that automatic control is notcomplete (except for temperature control,
which is always automatic) indicated by theleft led on.

fig. 102

118

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0B0074m

Pressing button (10) - the climate
control automatically activates timed operation of all the functions needed toquicken demisting/defrosting of the windscreen and front side windows, i.e.:– it turns on the climate control compressor;– switches off inside air recirculation, if on(both leds off);

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARQUICK FRONT WINDOWDEMISTING/DEFROSTING
BUTTON(- MAX-DEF function) (fig. 103)

– sets the maximum air temperature (HI)on both displays (2) and (5);– operates the fan at a predefined speed;– directs the flow of air towards the windscreen and front side window vents;– turns on rearscreen heating and, if present, the wing mirror coils.

fig. 103
When the maximum demisting/defrosting
function is on, the led on button (10) -,the led on the rearscreen heating button (9)( and the led on button (12) √ comeon; at the same time the leds on button (7)v go out.

IMPORTANT If the engine is not warm
enough, the function will not engage the predefined fan speed immediately, to limit theflow to the passenger compartment of air thatis not warm enough to demist the windows.

119

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

When the maximum demisting/defrosting
function is on, the only manual operations
possible are manual adjustment of the fan
and switching rearscreen heating off.

A0B0075m

Pressing one of the following buttons:(10) -, (7) v, (11) MONO, (14)
AUTO or (12) √ the system switches off
the maximum demisting/defrosting function, resuming the system operating conditions prior to turning it on, in addition toactivating the last function required, if any.
WING MIRROR AND
REARSCREEN DEFROSTING/
DEMISTING BUTTON(fig. 104)(

Pressing button (9) ( , turns on demisting/defrosting of the rearscreen and, if present, the wing mirror coils.
The activation of this function is shownby the turning on of the led on the button.

fig. 104
IMPORTANT Rear heated window manual on/off control prevails over automatic
activation decided by the climate control system control unit.

120

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

This function is timed and switches off automatically after 20 minutes, or pressing the
button again; the function is also switched
off when the engine is stopped and will not
be switched on again the next time the engine is started.

IMPORTANT Do not apply stickers on
the inside of the rearscreen over the heating filaments to avoid damage that mightcause it to stop working properly.
IMPORTANT When reconnecting thenegative battery cable after having disconnected it, wait for 2 minutes before turning the key to enable the climate control system to reset actuator strokes properly.

POLLEN FILTER
This filter has the specific capability of combining the mechanical filtering of the air with
an electrostatic effect so that the outside air
admitted to the passenger compartment ispurified and free from particles such as dust,
pollen, etc.

If the vehicle is used mainly in polluted
or dusty areas it should be checked and if
necessary replaced, at shorter intervals.

In addition to the above, it also effectively reduces the concentration of pollutants.
The filtering action takes place under all
air inlet conditions and it is clearly most effective with the windows shut.
Have the conditions of the filter checked
by Alfa Romeo Authorized Services at least
once a year, preferably t the onset of summer.

Failure to replace the filter may considerably reduce the effectiveness ofthe climate control system up to
blocking the air flow from the outlets and vents.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

IMPORTANT The system turns onrearscreen heating automatically if the temperature is below 3°C.

121

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARCONTROLSHAZARD WARNING LIGHTS(fig. 106)TAILGATE OPENING (fig. 105)

They are switched on by pressing button(A), regardless of the position of the ignition key.

To open the boot pull the lever (A) at theside of the driver’s seat.

When the hazard warning lights are
switched on, the switch itself begins to flash
together with the direction indicator warning lights and the emergency indicator on
the instrument panel. This functions isswitched off by pressing the button again.

FRONT FOGLIGHTS (fig. 107)
These come on when button (A) ispressed and when the external lights are already on.
The warning light 5 will light up on the
instrument panel.
By turning the ignition key to STOP, thefog lights are turned off automatically anddo not come on the next time the engine
is started without pressing button (A).
Press the button (A) again to switch thefront foglights off.

WARNING
Do not operate the bootrelease lever with the caron the move.

WARNINGUse of the hazard warning lights is ruled by the
Highway Code of the country inwhich the car is used. Observe regulations.

A0B0042m

122 fig. 105

A0B0036m

fig. 106

A0B0285m

fig. 107

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

IMPORTANT The front foglights should
be used in compliance with the local trafficlaws.

These are turned on, with the dipped beam
headlamps or fog lights on, by pressing button (B).
At the same time, warning light 4 on the
instrument cluster lights up.
By turning the ignition key to STOP, thefog guards are automatically turned off andthey do not come on the next time the engine is started unless button (B) is pressed.

DASHBOARD LIGHTING
ADJUSTMENT (fig. 108)

INERTIAL FUEL CUT-OFF
SWITCH (fig. 109)

When the outside lights are on, the dashboard lighting is adjusted by pressing button(A).

This is an automatic safety switch which is
triggered in the event of crash to interrupt
the flow of fuel.

Each press of the button (A) cyclically selects one of the three lighting levels provided: low-medium-high.

The message + symbol are shown on the
Infocenter display when the fuel cut-off
switch comes into operation (see “Infocenter Display“ in this section) and by the door
unlocking.

Press button (B) to turn them off.
IMPORTANT Always use the rear fog
guards in accordance with local regulations
in force.

A0B0326m

fig. 108

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0B0327m

fig. 109

AlfaWiki.nl

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARREAR FOG GUARDS (fig. 107)123

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

OPENING THE FUEL
FLAP (fig. 110)WARNING
If a smell of fuel is noted
following an accident, or
the fuel system is leaking, to avoid
the risk of fire do not reset theswitch.

The fuel tank flap is released from inside
the car raising the front part of the lever (A).

Inspect the care carefully to make sure that
there are no fuel leaks, for instance in the engine compartment, under the vehicle or near
the tank area.

If the car is fitted with xenon headlights,
beam aiming is electric and therefore control (A) on plate at the side of the steering column is not present.

If no leaks are found and the vehicle canbe restarted again, press button (A) to activate the fuel supply system.

The headlights should be aimed correctly
depending on the vehicle load.

HEADLIGHT CORRECTOR(fig. 111)

The control (A) on the plate at the side of
the steering column can be moved to four
positions corresponding to the vehicle loads
given below:
Position 0 : 1 or 2 people occupying front
seats, full fuel tank, on-board equipment present;
Position 1: 5 people on-board;
Position 2 : 5 people on-board, luggage
compartment full (50 kg approximately);
Position 3 : Driver and 300 kg in luggage
compartment.

After an impact, turn the ignition key to
STOP to prevent battery running down.

A0B0044m

A0B0240m

WARNING
Check the positioning of
the headlight beams every
time you change the load to be carried.

124 fig. 110

fig. 111

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

The hand brake lever is located between
the two front seats.
To operate the brake when the vehicle is“stationary“, pull the lever (A) upwards until the required braking action is obtained.
When the ignition key is in the MAR position, the x warning light will come on on
the instrument panel.

WARNING
The wheels should belocked after a few clicks ofthe hand brake lever. If this does
not occur, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to have the handbrake adjusted.

To release the hand brake:– slightly lift the lever (A) and press therelease button (B);

IMPORTANT The handbrake lever (A)is fitted with a safety device which prevents
the brake from being released when, if thelever is pulled, button (B) is pressed. Therefore, to release the brake, in addition topressing button (B), it is also necessary topull lever (A) further upwards to release thesafety device, then lower the lever completely.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

HAND BRAKE (fig. 112)

– holding the button down lower the lever.
The x warning light on the instrument panel will go out.
To prevent the car from moving accidentally, keep the brake pedal pressed whenengaging the handbrake.
A0B0288m

125

fig. 112

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARGEARSHIFT LEVER (fig. 113)
The car is fitted with a six speed mechanical gearbox.
The position of the individual gears isshown by the pictogram on the gearshift
lever knob.

IMPORTANT Reverse gear can only beengaged with the vehicle completely
stopped. With the engine running, before
engaging reverse gear it is necessary to wait
for at least 3 seconds with the clutch pedal
fully pressed, to avoid grating and the possibility of damaging the gears.

When changing gear, always fully depress
the clutch pedal. Before engaging reversegear (R) wait for the car to be stationary.
For versions fitted with six speed gearbox,
to engage reverse gear (R), raise the ringunder the grip (with the fingers of the same
hand holding the lever).
After engaging reverse gear, release thering. It is not necessary to raise the ring on
the lever when shifting from reverse to another gear.

A0B0408m

WARNINGTo change gear smoothly,
the clutch pedal must be
fully depressed. Therefore, there
should be no hindrances under thepedal unit. Make sure that any
mats are well laid and do not interfere with the pedals.

126 fig. 113

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Do not drive with yourhand resting on thegearshift lever, since theapplied pressure, though slight,
may, with the passing of time,
damage parts inside the gear.

(optional for versions/markets
where applicable)

Car can be supplied with a mechanicalgearbox with electronic control, called “Selespeed”.
The Selespeed considerably simplifies theuse of the car, it reduces driving fatigue intown or when frequent gearshifting is necessary, but at the same time it assures brilliant performance.

IMPORTANT To be able to use the Selespeed correctly, this chapter should be readin full to understand the correct, permissible
operations to be carried out right from thestart.
This device comprises a conventional mechanical gearbox to which an electronically-operated electro-hydraulic device has been
added which automatically controls the
clutch and gear engagement.
The clutch pedal has been eliminated andthe vehicle moves off using only the accelerator pedal.

Gearshifting takes place through a floating
control lever (A-fig. 114) with only one
stable central position. Using this lever it ispossible to request increase/decrease of theratio of the gear engaged and/or engagement of reverse gear (R) or neutral (N).
There are also two levers on the steering
wheel spokes (fig. 115) through which,
only with the car on the move (with speed
above 0.5 km/h), it is possible to shift gearup or down.

A0B0448m

fig. 114

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0B0455m

fig. 115

AlfaWiki.nl

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

SELESPEED GEARBOX127

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

The gearbox can work in two operating
modes:– the first is semiautomatic(then called
MANUAL), in which the driver directly requests gearshifting through the lever on thecentre console or pressing the buttons at thesteering wheel;– the second is automatic, called CITY
(mode selectable with the specific button
B-fig. 114, the CITY sign appears on thedisplay fig. 116 fitted on rev-counter), in
which the system decides directly when to
shift gear.

With the gearbox in the CITY mode it isstill possible to carry out manual gearshifting, both using the gear lever and the steering wheel controls. The gearbox remains in
the CITY mode.
The gear engaged (fig. 116) is always
signalled on the display regardless of the selected mode.
N = neutral;
1 = first gear;
2 = second gear;
3 = third gear;
4 = fourth gear;
5 = fifth gear;
6 = sixth gear;
R = reverse.

A0B0402m

128 fig. 116

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Failures of Selespeed gearbox are signalled
to the driver through a warning light (Afig. 116) accompanied by an acoustic signal.

IMPORTANT Opening the driver’s door,
the Selespeed starts the hydraulic part ofthe system to prepare it for the engine to be
started. This function (noted by the turningof the electric pump) is deactivated after 10
openings/closings of the door that are notfollowed by actual system activation using
the ignition key.
Turning the ignition key to MAR, all thesegments of the display (B-fig. 116), thegearbox failure warning light (A-fig. 116)
and the word CITYlight up. After about one
second, the display indicates the gear engaged (N, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, R); from thismoment, the Selespeed system accepts
gearshift commands.

OPERATION WITH THE
ENGINE OFF

To request gearshifting, in addition to keeping the brake pedal pressed it is necessary to:

IMPORTANT Before operating the gearshift control lever, always check the gear engaged on the display (N, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,
6, R).

– to increase gear (+) (fig. 117) push
the lever “forwards” (if the car is in first gear
this shifts to second, if it is in second gear
it goes to third and so on up to fifth). If thesystem is in neutral (N) or reverse (R) the
forward movement on the lever causes engagement of first gear (1).

When the engine is off and the vehicle isstationary, it is possible to engage all thegears.
With the vehicle stationary and with thebrake pedal pressed, requests to shift gear
are accepted only if they are carried out
through the control lever on the central console.

IMPORTANT If after 10 seconds the display segment do not display the gear engaged or the failure warning light stays on,turn the ignition key to STOP and wait forthe display to go off, then repeat the system activation procedure. If the fault persists, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services

A0B0449m

fig. 117

A0B0450m

fig. 118

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine– to shift down (–) (fig. 117) push thelever backwards (if the car is in fifth gear
it moves to fourth, if fourth gear is engaged
it shifts to third and so on down to first).

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARSYSTEM ACTIVATION

129

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

To put the gearbox in neutral (N), starting from the condition with the vehicle stationary and the brake pedal pressed, it isnecessary to move the gearshift control leverto the right (fig. 118).

From any gear (N, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) andwith the vehicle practically at a standstill,
it is possible to request engagement of reverse gear, pushing the lever to the right andthen backwards (fig. 119). If the vehicle is on the move, the request is not accepted; wait for the car to stop and thenrequest reverse gear engagement again

IMPORTANT Once a gear has beenshifted it is necessary to release the gearshift
control lever immediately after making therequest. A prolonged action (over 10 seconds) causes automatic shifting to CITY;
previous conditions are restored when releasing the lever.
IMPORTANT If wanting to leave the carparked on a sloping road with a gear engaged to keep it braked, it is necessary tocheck that the Infocenter display shows the
new gear engaged and then wait for 1 to
2 seconds before releasing the brake pedal to allow complete clutch engagement.

A0B0451m

130 fig. 119

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

The engine can be started with the gear
engaged or in neutral (N), provided that thebrake pedal is pressed down.
IMPORTANT Keep the brake pedal
pressed during the starting operation. As thebrake pedal stiffens if it is pressed repeatedly with the engine off, in this situation, toallow the engine to be started, it is necessary to increase the pressure exerted on thepedal itself.
After starting, the gearbox automaticallysets to neutral, the display shows the letter (N) and the system selects the operating mode stored before switching off.

WARNING
If the engine fails to startwith the gear engaged, thedriver is alerted of the potentially
dangerous situation due to the factthat the gearbox has automatically set to neutral by the buzzer andthe display on the rev counter.

TURNING THE ENGINE OFF
AND SYSTEM DEACTIVATION
Turning the ignition key to STOP the engine switches off but the Selespeed systemstill remains active, waiting for the vehicle
to stop completely. After about 2 - 4 seconds
from when the key has been turned to the
STOP position, the hydraulic part is deactivated; the Selespeed system is only deactivated at this point.
The gear selected before turning the engine off remains engaged.
If the engine stops with the gearbox inneutral (N), the buzzer draws the attentionof the driver so that the vehicle can be put
in safety conditions engaging the first gear(1) or reverse (R). In this case, it is necessary to turn the ignition key to MAR andwith the brake pedal pressed, engage firstgear (1) or reverse (R).

WARNING
NEVER leave the car withthe gearbox in neutral (N).

WARNING
Never remove the key
when the car is on themove, because in addition to thefact that the Selespeed system
would not work properly until
stopping the car, the steering
wheel would automatically lock at
the first turn.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

STARTING THE ENGINEWARNING
It is absolutely necessary
to turn off the engine consequently deactivating the Selespeed system keeping the brake
pedal pressed: release the pedal
ONLY when the display on the rev
counter goes off.

131

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

MOVING OFF
With the engine running and the vehicle
stationary, the gears that can be engaged
for moving off are only first (1), second (2)or reverse (R).
To engage them it is possible to use thecontrol lever on the centre console, with thebrake pedal pressed, as the levers on thesteering wheel allow gear engagement only over 10 km/h.
IMPORTANT Reverse gear (R) can be
engaged from each of the following otherratios: neutral (N), first gear (1) or second
gear (2). If the car is on the move, the request is not accepted; it is necessary to wait
for the car to be completely stopped andthen request reverse (R) again.
The driver is informed of the reverse gear
engaged condition by the intermittent soundof the buzzer as well as by the display on
the rev counter.
IMPORTANT If while shifting from reverse (R)/first gear (1) to neutral(N)/first gear (1) sticking occurs on thefirst gear, the system automatically engages
second gear (2).

This should not be considered as a fault as
it is part of the operating logic. For the same
reason, in the event of sticking on reverse,
the system commands partial clutch closing
to allow engagement of the gear; in thiscase engagement of reverse gear (R) willbe less comfortable.
Moving off of the vehicle is obtained:
1) releasing the brake pedal;
2) gradually operating the accelerator pedal.
The vehicle pick-up torque is higher the
more the accelerator pedal is pressed.
With ASR off (through the relevant ASR
OFF button), starting will be more “brilliant”.
WARNING
After a request to shift
gear with the vehicle stationary, before pressing the accelerator pedal to make the car start,
the driver must always check thatthe gear engaged shown on thedisplay is the one required.

132

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

IMPORTANTS– With the vehicle stationary and a gear
engaged, always keep the brake pedal
pressed until you decide to move off;
– in prolonged stops with the engine running it is advisable to keep the gearbox isneutral;– when the car is parked on a slope, do
not use the pick-up manoeuvre to keep thevehicle stopped; use the brake pedal andwork on the accelerator pedal only when
you decide to move off;
– use second gear only when necessary
to obtain better control of pick-up in low
speed manoeuvres;– if, with reverse gear engaged, you needto engage first gear or vice versa, shift gear
only when the car is completely stationary
and with the brake pedal pressed.

Downhill with the gear engaged and theaccelerator released (if the vehicle is travelling), if a certain pre-established speed isexceeded, the system automatically engages the clutch to provide adequate engine
braking.

Still for safety reasons, when the vehicle
is stationary, with the engine started andgear (1), (2) or (R) engaged, the system
activates the buzzer and shifts to neutral(N) automatically when:– there is no action on the accelerator
and/or brake pedal for at least 3 minutes;– the brake pedal is pressed for over 10
minutes;– the driver’s door is opened and the accelerator and brake pedal are not pressed
for at least 1 second.

STOPPING THE CAR
To stop the vehicle, simply release the accelerator pedal and, if necessary, operate
the brake pedal.
Regardless of the gear engaged and of theoperating mode activated (MANUAL or
CITY), the system automatically disengages the clutch and downshifts gear.
If you intend to move off again without
having completely stopped the car, this way
the most suitable gear ratio for re-accelerating will be available.
Stopping the vehicle, the system automatically engages first gear (1).

Due to safety reasons, the Selespeed system activates the buzzer when:

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Though strongly inadvisable, if due to unforeseen circumstances when driving downhill the car is allowed to travel with the gearbox in neutral (N), when the engagementof a gear is requested, the system automatically engages the best gear to allow
transmission of the torque to the wheels in
relation to the speed of the car.

– clutch overheating occurs during vehicle
starting; in this case, it is necessary to“force” moving off avoiding hesitations or
to release the accelerator and use the brake
pedal to park the vehicle if the car is on aslope;– the car moves in the opposite direction
to the gear engaged, (e.g.: vehicle moving
forward with reverse engaged); in this situation it is necessary to stop the vehicle andkeeping the brake pedal pressed, engage
the gear correctly.

133

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

OPERATION
The gearbox can work in two operating
modes:– the first is semiautomatic (MANUAL),
in which the driver directly decides when to
shift gear;– the second is completely automatic(CITY), in which the system decides directly when to shift gear according to thetype of driving.
The CITY mode can be selected by pressing the specific button CITY on the gearbox
lever knob; when this mode is selected, the
CITY sign appears on the display fitted on
rev counter.

SEMIAUTOMATIC OPERATION(MANUAL)
In the MANUAL operating mode the display on the rev counter shows the gear engaged.

The MANUAL operating mode is set
when, with the CITY mode selected, the
CITY button (B-fig. 120) is pressedagain, excluding the previously selectedmode.

In this operating mode, the decision tochange gear is left to the driver who decides
the most appropriate moment.

When shifting gear, releasing the accelerator pedal is not necessary because the Selespeed system directly controls the engine
so as to:The requests to change gear can take placethrough:– reduce and then increase the engine
torque;– the control lever on the centre console(A-fig. 120);– adapt the engine speed to the new gear
ratio engaged.

– the levers on the steering wheel(fig. 121), which can be used only whenthe vehicle speed exceeds 10 km/h.

When downshifting, double de-clutching(acceleration of the engine to bring it to the
speed necessary with the new gear ratio) is
carried out automatically.
The move to neutral (N) command is accepted when the car speed exceeds
0.5 km/h.

A0B0448m

A0B0455m

The command to engage reverse gear (R)is accepted only if the car is stationary.
With the accelerator pedal pressed by over
60% of its stroke and with an engine speedof over 5,000 rpm, gearshifting becomesquicker.

134 fig. 120

fig. 121

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

– when slowing down, the clutch is
opened and the gear ratio is reduced automatically to be ready for possibly picking up
speed again; if not, stopping the vehicle,
first gear (1) will be engaged automatically;– request to change gear that could takethe engine above the maximum rpm or below the minimum permissible rpm are notaccepted;– if sticking occurs during the engagementof a gear, the system firstly tries to engage
the required gear again and, if it is still notpossible, it automatically engages the immediately higher one to avoid leaving thevehicle in neutral speed.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION (CITY)FAILURE SIGNALLINGThe CITY automatic operating mode is selected pressing the button (A-fig. 122),
at the base of the gearshift lever.

Failures to the Selespeed gearbox are indicated by the t (A-fig. 123) warning light on the instrument cluster.

In addition to the gear, the display on therev counter will show the word CITY.

When the system is turned on (turning theignition key to MAR), the warning lightshould turn on glowing steadily for about
4 seconds and then turn off.

The system decides directly when gearshifting according to the engine running speed
and the driving style.
Quickly releasing the accelerator pedal, thesystem does not engage a higher gear in order to maintain an adequate level of engine
brake.

IMPORTANT It is advisable to wait fora gearshift to end before requesting another one, this will avoid multiple requests inquick succession.

A0B0447m

fig. 122

A0B0404m

fig. 123

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

If the warning light stays on it means thata fault to the gearbox has been detected; atthe same time a buzzer sounds intermittently for 4 seconds to attract the driver's
attention.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

In the MANUAL mode there are some
automatic/safety devices which make driving easier:135

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

If the warning light t
comes on, contact the Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services
as soon as possible to remove thefault.

In the case of a fault to the gearshift lever,the system automatically activates the automatic CITY mode to allow the car toreach the nearest Authorized Alfa Romeo
Services to have the fault detected eliminated.
In the event of faults to other componentsof the gearbox, the system only allows theengagement of certain ratios: first gear (1),second (2) and reverse (R).

SIGNALLING WITH THE BUZZERPARKING THE VEHICLE

The buzzer is activated when:

To park the car safely it is absolutely
necessary to engage first gear (1) or reverse (R) and, when on a sloping road, also engage the hand-brake.

– reverse gear (R) is engaged;– the vehicle is parked with the gearbox
at neutral (N); this can be seen turning theignition key to STOP;– clutch overheating takes place during
pick-up;– the car moves in the opposite direction
to the gear engaged (e.g.: the car tends to
do downhill with reverse gear engaged);– in the event of gearbox failure;– the system has automatically engaged
neutral (N) after:• there is no action on the accelerator
and/or brake pedal for at least 3 minutes;• the brake pedal is pressed for over 10
minutes;WARNING
In case of transmission
fault, contact the Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services assoon as possible to check the system.

• the driver’s door is opened and the accelerator and brake pedal are notpressed for at least 1 second;• detection of a gearbox fault.

136

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Turning the engine off with the car facing
uphill and a gear engaged, it is absolutely necessary to wait for the display on
the rev counter to go off before releasing
the brake pedal, so that the clutch has
innested completely.
If the gearbox is in neutral (N) and you
want to engage a parking gear, it is necessary to activate the system and engage thegear (1) or reverse (R) with your foot on
the brake pedal.

WARNING For towing the vehicle, adhere to local regulations. Make sure that the
gearbox is in neutral (N) (checking that the
car moves when pushed) and proceed as for
towing a normal car with mechanical gearbox following the instructions given in thechapter “In an emergency”.

INTERNAL FITTINGS

To open the glovebox use lever (Afig. 124).

GLOVEBOX

The compartment is lit by a courtesy lightwhen it is open (when the ignition key is
at MAR (B-fig. 125).

On the dashboard there is a key-lockable
glovebox with light. The lock can be
opened/closed using the ignition key.

There is a recess on the lid (C-fig. 125)
for inserting a pen or pencil.

Should it be impossible to set to neutral,
do not tow the vehicle; contact Alfa Romeo
Authorised Services.
WARNING
Do not travel with theglovebox open; it could
harm the passenger in the event ofan accident.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

TOWING THE VEHICLEWARNING
Do not start the engine
when towing the vehicle.
A0B0262m

fig. 124

fig. 125

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0B0261m

137

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

GRAB HANDLES (fig. 126)

CEILING LIGHTS

Grab handles are set above the front doors.

The car is fitted with passenger’s compartment ceiling lights (front/rear) with
gradual switching on/off. Timings, defined
as max. switching on time elapsing between
the end of gradual switching on and the startof gradual switching off are as follows:

Two grab handles (A) fitted with a coat
hook (B) are located above the rear doors.

IMPORTANT With ignition key at
STOP or when opening a door or the tailgate 15 minutes timing is activated, thenceiling lights go off. Timing restarts eachtime a door/tailgate is opened.
Front ceiling light (fig. 127)
The roof light comprises two lights with thecontrol switch.

1) approx. 6 seconds when:– unlocking the doors manually or by theremote control– closing the driver’s door to get into the
car and fit the key into the ignition switch– removing the key from the ignition
switch2) approx. 3 minutes from the door opening

With switch (A) in the central position(1), both lights turn on when a door is
opened.
When the doors are closed, a timer is activated for about 7 seconds, to allow the car
to be started. The lights go out when the ignition key is turned to MAR (with the doors
closed).
Moving switch (A) to the left (position 0),
the lights stay off (position OFF).

A0B0124m

A0B0260m

Moving switch (A) to the right (position
2) both lights stay on.
The spot function is operated by switch(B).

138 fig. 126

fig. 127

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

With switch (B) in the central position (position 0) the spotlights stay off.
IMPORTANT Before leaving the car,make sure that both switches are in the central position. This way, the roof lights will goout when the doors are closed. If a door isleft open, the lights will go out automaticallyafter a few seconds.

Courtesy light (fig. 128)
Lowering the passenger’s sun visor, thecourtesy light on the roof lining can be seen.
This light makes it possible to use the courtesy mirror under conditions with dim light.
On Sportwagon versions there is also a
courtesy light under the driver’s sun visor.
Use switch (A) to turn it on and off, with
the ignition key at MAR.

Rear roof light (fig. 129)
(except versions with sunroof)
In correspondence with each rear door there
is a light which turns on automatically whena door is opened.
They are timed and work in the same way
as described for the front roof light.
They can be turned on and off by handpressing the transparent cover (A) on thecircular impression.

To turn them on again, simply open another door or close the same one and open
it again.

A0B0259m

fig. 128

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0B0258m

fig. 129

AlfaWiki.nl

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Moving switch (B) to the left (position 1)
the left spot light turns on. Moving switch
to the right (position 2) the right spot lightturns on.

139

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Centre rear roof lamp (fig. 130)
(only versions with sunroof)

FRONT ASHTRAYAND CIGAR LIGHTER (fig. 131)

On the roof lamp there is a switch withthree positions. When the switch (A) is in
the central position (0) the roof lamp turns
on automatically when a door is opened.

To open the ashtray push and release thefront of the ashtray.

Lighting up is timed and it works as described for the front roof lamp.
Moving the switch to the right (position 1)
the roof lamp stays off all the time.
Moving the switch to the left (position 2)
the roof lamp stays on all the time.

To use the cigar lighter press, with the ignition key at MAR, button (B); after someseconds the knob will return automaticallyto its initial position and the cigar lighter isready for use.
Remove the tray (A) to empty and clean
the ashtray.

WARNING
The cigar lighter gets extremely hot. Handle withcare and prevent its use by children:
danger of fire and/or burning.

Always ensure that thecigar lighter has turned off.

IMPORTANT Before leaving the car
make sure that the switch (A) is in the central position (0), so that the lamp goes out
when the doors are closed.

A0B0257m

140 fig. 130

A0B0256m

fig. 131

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

WARNING
Do not use the ashtray as
paper bin: it could set on
fire on contact with cigarette stubs.

An ashtray (A) is fitted to each rear door.
To open, pull downwards as shown below.

ODDMENTS RECESSESON CENTRE CONSOLE(fig. 133)ODDMENTS RECESSESON DASHBOARD

Centre recess

An oddments recess (A) is provided on thelower side of the dashboard, on the left ofthe steering column.

Left side recess (fig. 134)

On the centre console near the handbrakelever, there are the following oddments recesses:– oddments recesses (A) and (B);– coin recess (C).

A0B0255m

fig. 132

A0B0283m

fig. 133

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0B0254m

fig. 134

AlfaWiki.nl

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARREAR ASHTRAYS (fig. 132)141

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARFRONT DOORSCOMPARTMENTS AND
POCKETS (fig. 135)

SUN VISORS
They can be adjusted frontally and laterally.

Each front door has an oddments pocket(A).

On the back of the visors there is a courtesy mirror with sliding cover (A-fig. 136),
lit by the lamp (B).
The passenger’s sun visor bears also thesymbol for correct use of children’s seats incars equipped with passenger’s airbag. For
further information, see the descriptions given in paragraph “Passenger’s front airbag“in this chapter.

TELEPHONE
PROVISION(on request for versions/markets where applicable)
On request for versions/markets whereapplicable, the car may be fitted with a provision for the installation of a cellular telephone.
This provision comprises:– sound system two-function aerial + cellular phone;– supply and connection cables with specific connector for voice kit connection.
The voice kit must be purchased separately by thecustomer, since it has to becompatible with the customer’s
own cellular phone.

A0B0253m

142 fig. 135

A0B0252m

For the installation of thecellular phone and connection to the provision in thecar, contact only Alfa Romeo Authorized Services; this will guarantee first-rate results with no possibility of any inconvenience that
may compromise the safety of thevehicle.

fig. 136

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

If, after purchasing your car, you want toinstall electric accessories that require permanent power supply (burglar alarm, voicefunction, radionavigator with satellite burglar alarm, etc.) or other accessories that affect the vehicle’s electric load, contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services, whose qualified
staff is able to recommend the most suitableequipment of the Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo,
and also assess the electric absorption of thesame, checking if the vehicle can withstandthe required load or if a battery of greater
power must be used.

RADIO
TRANSMITTERS
AND CELLPHONES

SUNROOF

Cellphones and other radio transmitters(e.g. CB radios) cannot be used inside thevehicle, unless you use a separate aerial
mounted outside the vehicle.

The sunroof can only be operated when
the ignition key is in the MAR position.

WARNINGThe use of cellphones, CB
radios or similar inside thepassenger compartment (without
an outside aerial) produces electromagnetic RF fields; if these areamplified by the resonance inside
the passenger compartment, they
may not only result in a potential
health hazard, or poor functioningof the electronic systems such asengine control units, ABS/EBD control units, etc., fitted to the vehicle, but also put the safety of yourvehicle in jeopardy.

The transmission and reception efficiencyof this equipment may also be affected by
the shielding effect of the vehicle’s body.

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine(optional for versions/markets
where applicable)

WARNING
Improper use of the sunroof can be dangerous. Before and while operating it, always
make sure that the passengers are
not exposed to the risk of harmcaused either directly by the sunroof in motion or by personal items
drawn or knocked by it.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

ACCESSORIESPURCHASEDBY THE OWNER

Do not open the sunroof
when snow or ice are on
the roof as this may damage it.
WARNING
When leaving the vehicle,
the ignition key should always be removed to avoid accidents involving the sunroof which
could be inadvertently operated byany passenger remaining in the vehicle.

143

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARSLIDING FORWARDS/
BACKWARDS (fig. 137-138)
Press control button (A) on rear end (1)to open the roof; press on front end (2) toclose it.
When the button is released, the sunroof
will stop in that position.
For versions/markets where applicable,
during opening the roof stops automatically in an intermediate position called “Comfort“, which is advised for average speeds.
In this case, complete opening is obtainedpressing the rear end (1) of button (A)again. When closing, the roof does not stopin the “Comfort“.

The sunroof is fitted with a curtain below,
which prevents sun radiation and is drawn
by hand using a catch.
The curtain is drawn by the roof when theroof opens and is pushed completely inside
the roof panel when the roof is opened completely. With the closing movement the curtain will come out partially so that the handcatch is accessible (A-fig. 139).

Press the rear end (1) of the button (Afig. 141) to return the sunroof to the horizontal position (roof closed).

A0B0249m

fig. 138

A0B0248m

fig. 139

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

This can only be achieved (fig. 140)
when the sunroof is completely closed,pressing front end (2) of the control button(A-fig. 141).

WARNING
Open and close the roof
only when the vehicle isstationary.

A0B0041m

144 fig. 137

RAISING TO THE
QUARTERLIGHT POSITIONIf the electrical control device does notwork, the sunroof can be opened manuallyas follows:

IMPORTANT When the operation has
been ended, the key should be turned half
a turn in the opposite direction, until aclick is heard, before it is removed.

The tailgate can be opened from outside
the vehicle (pressing the button on the ignition key) and from inside the vehicle.

– apply leverage to the points indicatedby the arrows and remove the plate withswitch (D-fig. 141);

IMPORTANT If the boot is not properly shut, the symbol ´ on the Infocenter display will come on (together with the indication of the relevant message).

– using the special key (B-fig. 142)
provided in the glovebox, press androtate the sunroof control bushing(C-fig. 142) clockwise to open and counterclockwise to close.

A0B0247m

fig. 140

A0B0246m

fig. 141

A0B0245m

fig. 142

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

LUGGAGECOMPARTMENTGETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

EMERGENCY OPERATION

145

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

OPENING FROM INSIDE
To open the boot from inside the passenger compartment, pull the lever (A-fig.
143), at the side of the driver’s seat.

WARNING
Only use the boot opening lever with the vehicle
stationary.

Lifting the boot lid is made easier by theaction of gas springs.

OPENING WITHREMOTE CONTROL (fig. 144)
The luggage compartment can be opened
by remote control from outside pressing the
button (C-fig. 144), also when the electronic alarm is on.

The gas springs are calibrated to guarantee correct
operation with loading
specified by the manufacturer. Arbitrary additions to the boot lid(spoiler, etc.) may affect its operation and safety.

In this case, the alarm system switches offvolumetric protection and the boot lid control sensor. The system also sounds two
beeps and the direction indicators light up
for about three seconds (with the exceptionof versions for certain markets).
Closing the boot again the control functions
are restored, the system sounds two beeps
and the direction indicators light up for about
three seconds (with the exception of versions
for certain markets).

A0B0042m

A0B0743m

146 fig. 143

fig. 144

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

BOOT LIGHTING (fig. 145)

To close the boot, lower it and press down
above the locking mechanism until it isheard to click into place.

Opening the boot, the light (A) in the upper part of the boot turns on automatically.
The light goes out closing the boot or after a few minutes (about 15) if the boot isleft open. In this case, to turn it on again
close the boot, then open it again.

A0B0241m

fig. 145

The load carried may be blocked withstraps hooked to the special rings in the bootcorners.
The rings also serve to secure the luggage
retaining net (available upon request, forversions/markets where applicable) c/o Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

A0B0242m

fig. 146

A0B0243m

fig. 147

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

SECURING THE LOAD
(fig. 146-147)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

CLOSING THE BOOT

147

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

CAUTIONS FORCARRYING LUGGAGE
Travelling at night with a load in the bootit is necessary to adjust the height of the low
beam headlights (see next paragraph“Headlights“ in this chapter). For correct useof the aiming device, also make sure thatthe load does not exceed the values givenin the same paragraph.

WARNING
Do not load the luggage
compartment above thepermitted maximum (see “Technical specifications“). Also make surethat the objects contained in theboot are well secured to prevent
them from being thrown forwardcausing harm to the passengers in
the event of sharp braking.

WARNINGA heavy load that has notbeen secured may cause
serious harm to passengers in theevent of an accident.

BONNET
The lever used to open the bonnet is located under the left end of the dashboard.
To open:– Pull the lever (A-fig. 148) until thebonnet clicks open.

WARNING
When wanting to carry aspare can of petrol, thismust be done in compliance withthe law, only using a certified can,appropriately fastened to the load
restraint eyelets. Even so, the riskof fire is increased.

WARNING
Only with the car stationary.

A0B0049m

148

fig. 148

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

– Press the safety lever (B-fig. 149)
upwards.

WARNINGDANGER-SERIOUS INJURY. When carrying out
checks or maintenance operationsin the engine compartment, takespecial care not to bump the headon the raised bonnet.

To close:– lower the bonnet to approx. 20 cm fromthe engine compartment, then let it drop.
Try lifting it to make sure that it is shut completely and not simply caught in the safety
position.
If the bonnet does not close properly, do
not push it down but open it again and repeat the above procedure.

– Raise the bonnet.
IMPORTANT Bonnet raising is aided by
two gas springs. Do not tamper with these
springs and accompany the bonnet whileraising it.

WARNINGIf checks need to be carried out in the engine compartment when the engine is still
warm, keep away from the fan as
it could start up even when the key
is removed from the ignition. Wait
until the engine cools down.

WARNINGFor safety reasons thebonnet shall always be
perfectly closed when travelling.
Always check for proper bonnet
locking. If the bonnet is left inadvertently open, stop the car immediately and close the bonnet.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNING
Before lifting the bonnet,
make sure that the windscreen wiper arms are not raised
from the windscreen.

A0B0048m

WARNING
Scarves, ties and loose
clothing may be caught inthe moving parts causing serious
damages.

149

fig. 149

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARHEADLIGHTS
LIGHT BEAM AIMINGIMPORTANT The adjustment of theheadlights is vital to your safety and comfort and to that of other road users. The adjustment of the headlights is also governedby precise regulations. To guarantee both to
yourself and to the other drivers the best visibility conditions when travelling with theheadlights on, the vehicle must have its
headlights properly adjusted. Contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services to have theheadlights correctly adjusted.
COMPENSATION FOR TILT
(fig. 150)
If the car is fitted with xenon headlights,
beam aiming is electric and therefore control (A) located on the plate at the side of
the steering column is not present.

This control has four positions corresponding to various vehicle loads given below:– position 0: 1 or 2 people occupying
front seats, full fuel tank, on-board equipment present;

ADJUSTING
THE FRONT FOGLIGHTS
To adjust the height of the beam of thefront foglights, act on adjusting screw(A-fig. 151).

– position 1: 5 people on-board;– position 2: 5 people on-board, luggage
compartment full (50 kg approximately);– position 3: driver and 300 kg in luggage compartment.

WARNING
Check the positioning of
the headlight beams every
time you change the load to be carried.

Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to havethe headlights correctly adjusted.

A0B0240m

A0B0239m

When the vehicle is loaded, the beam fromthe headlights is raised due to the backwards tilt of the vehicle.
In this case the headlights must be adjusted using control (A) located on the plateat the side of the steering column.

150

fig. 151

fig. 150

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

The gas (xenon) discharge headlights operate with a voltaic arc, in an ambient saturated with pressure xenon, instead of theglow filament.
The resulting illumination is sensibly higher to that of conventional lamps, both forlight quality (clearer light) and for the widthand positioning of the illuminated area.
The advantages of better illumination canbe perceived (due to less eyesight fatigue
and greater orientation capacity for the driver, which in turn means higher driving safety) especially in case of bad weather, fog
and/or insufficient road signs, thanks to thebetter illumination of the side parts of thevisual field, normally obscured.
The large increase of the side part illumination increases driving safety since it allows
the driver to better see the other users on
the edge of the road (pedestrians, cyclists
and bikers).

The triggering of the voltaic arc requires avery high voltage, while subsequent power
supply can take place at a low voltage.
The headlights achieve their top luminosity approx. 15 seconds after they are switchedon.
The intense light produced by this type ofheadlights requires the use of an automatic system to keep headlight trim constantand avoid dazzling the vehicles coming fromthe opposite direction in case of braking, acceleration or when carrying loads.
The electromechanical system to automatically keep constant trim makes theheadlight tilt compensating device unnecessary.

DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHT
AIMING FOR LEFT-HAND/
RIGHT-HAND DRIVING(only for versions with gas
discharge headlights)
As regards cars equipped with gas discharge headlights (xenon lamps)(optional
for versions/markets where applicable) withvery great lighting power, when passing
from a country with right-hand driving to one
with left-hand driving, or vice versa, it is necessary to modify the orientation of thedipped beam headlights, to optimize the illumination of the road edge and avoid dazzling the vehicles coming from the opposite
direction.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARGAS DISCHARGEHEADLIGHTS(optional for versions/markets
where applicable)

To have this operation
carried out, contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Ser-

Xenon lights have a very long life, therefore breakdowns are unlikely.
vices.

WARNINGIf necessary, have thesystem checked and repaired only by Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

WARNING
When you go back toyour country of origin, remember to have the dipped beam
headlight orientation modified
again.

151

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

ABS
The car is fitted with an ABS system which
prevents wheel lock when braking, better
exploits wheel grip and keeps the vehicle
controllable within the limits of the available
grip also during emergency braking.
The driver can feel that the ABS is operational by a light pulsing of the brake pedal, accompanied by noise.
This should not interpreted as malfunctioning of the brakes, but it is the signal tothe driver that the ABS system is working:it is the warning that the car is travelling at
the limit of grip an that, therefore, it is necessary to adapt the speed to the type of roadon which you are travelling.
The ABS system is an additional part of thebasic braking system; in the event of a fault
it is disabled, leaving the braking systemin the same conditions as a car without ABS.

In the event of a failure, though being unable to rely on the antilock effect, there is absolutely no adverse effect on vehicle braking performance in terms of braking capacity.
If you have never used a car with ABS before, you are advised to learn how to use
it with a few preliminary trials on a slippery
surface, naturally under safety conditions
and fully adhering to the Highway Code of
the country concerned. You are also advised
to carefully read the following information.
The advantage of the ABS compared withthe conventional system is that it makes it
possible to maintain maximum vehicle handling performance also in the case of hardbraking under grip limit conditions, avoiding wheel lock.
Do not however expect the braking distance always to be reduced with the ABS
system: for example, on soft surfaces suchas gravel or fresh snow on slippery surfaces,
the distance might increase.

152

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

In order to be able to exploit as far as possible the possibility of the antilock systemin the case of need, it is wise to follow a few
pieces of advice:

WARNING
The ABS exploits theavailable grip in full, but it
cannot increase it; therefore, caution is required on slippery surfaces, without running unnecessary

WARNING
If the ABS cuts in, itmeans that the grip limit
between the tyres and the roadsurface has been reached: it is necessary to slow down and adapt
driving to the grip available.

Following these instructions you will bein a condition to obtain peak braking performance at all times.
IMPORTANT Cars fitted with ABS must
only be fitted with wheel rims, tyres and brakelinings of the type and brand approved by the
Manufacturer.
The braking system is completed by theelectronic control braking distribution systemcalled EBD (Electronic Braking Force Distributor) which distributes the braking action
through the ABS system control unit and sensors.

WARNING
If the x low brake fluid
warning light comes on (together with the message + symbol
shown by the display), stop the car
immediately and contact the nearest Alfa Romeo Authorized Services. Indeed, any leak of fluid
from the hydraulic system compromises the effectiveness of boththe conventional brake system andthe system with antilock system.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNINGIn the event of a systemfault, with lighting up of the> warning light on the instrument
cluster (together with the message+ symbol shown by the display),
have the vehicle checked immediately by Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services, driving slowly to be able
to regain full system performance.

Braking on corners always requires the utmost caution, even with the help of the ABS.
The most important piece of advice, however, is the following:

WARNING
When the ABS cuts in andyou feel the pedal pulse, do
not reduce the pressure, but keep
the brake pedal firmly pressedwith no fear; this way you willstop in the shortest possible space,compatibly with the conditions of
the road surface.

WARNING
The car is fitted with anelectronic brake distributor(EBD). If the > and x warning
lights come on at the same time
(together with the message + symbol shown by the display) whenthe engine is running, there is an
EBD system fault; in this case, violent braking may lock the rear
wheels too early, with the possibility of skidding. Drive extremely carefully to the nearest Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services tohave the system checked over.

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

153

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

ATTENZIONE
The turning on of the >warning light (together
with the message + symbol shownby the display) with the engine
running normally indicates an ABS
system fault. In this case the braking system preserves its effectiveness, without however making
use of the antilock device. Under
these circumstances, the EBD system may fail to give top performance. In this case, too, you arerecommended to contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services immediately, driving in such a way as to
avoid abrupt braking, to have thesystem checked.

ASR SYSTEM(Antislip Regulation)
The ASR function controls the vehicle drive and cuts in automatically every time one
or both driving wheels slip.
In slipping conditions, two different control
systems are activated:
1) if slipping involves both driving wheels,
being caused by excessive power transmitted, the ASR device cuts in reducing the power transmitted by the engine.
2) if slipping involves only one driving
wheel, the ASR system cuts in automatically braking the wheel that is slipping, with
an effect similar to that of a self-locking differential.

154

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

The action of the ASR is particularly helpful in the following circumstances:– slipping of the inner wheel on a bend,
due to the effect of dynamic load changes
or excessive acceleration.
– too much power transmitted to thewheels also in relation to the conditions of
the road surface.
– acceleration on slippery, snowy or frozen
surfaces.
– in the case of loss of grip on a wet surface (aquaplaning).

WARNING
The performance of thesystem in terms of active
safety should not induce the driverto take pointless and unnecessaryrisks. The style of driving must in
any case be adapted to the conditions of the road surface, visibility and traffic. Road safety is always the driver’s responsibility.

The ASR function switches on automatically each time the engine is started.
When travelling the device can be switched
off and on again pressing switch (Afig. 152) on the centre console.
When the device is switched off this isshown by the lighting up of the led on the
button, by the V warning light on the instrument panel turn on and by the message
ASR OFF on Infocenter display. If the function is switched off when travelling, it willturn on again automatically the next timethe engine is started.

A0B0286m

For correct operation of the ASR system
the tyres must absolutely be of the samebrand and type on all wheels, in perfectconditions and above all, of the specified
type, brand and size.
IMPORTANT When travelling on snow
with snow chains, it may be helpful to turn
the ASR device off: in fact, in these conditions, slipping of the driving wheels whenmoving off makes it possible to obtain better drive.
ASR system failure warning
In the event of a fault, the ASR systemswitches off automatically and the V warning light on the instrument cluster turns onwith fixed light, together with the message“ASR OFF” on the Infocenter display andbutton led (A-fig. 152).

The car is fitted with a special system, integral with the ASR system, that in case of
sudden gear shifting, cuts in providing torqueto the engine thus preventing excessive driving wheel drive that, specially in poor grip
conditions could lead to loss of stability.
ABD system
This system, integral with the ASR system,enables to modulate in a combined modethe pressure inside the brake circuit acting
on driving wheels and the engine torque.
The action of the ABD system is particularly helpful when driving uphill with driving
wheels under different grip conditions, i.e.:poor grip on one side and good grip on theother side.

In the event of an ASR system operating
failure, the car behaves in the same way
as a car that is not fitted with this system:in any case, it is advisable to contact Alfa
Romeo Authorised Services as soon as possible.

155

fig. 152

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

MSR system (Engine
drive adjustment)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

SWITCHING ON THE ASR
FUNCTIONGETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

EOBD SYSTEMThe EOBD (European On Board Diagnosis)
system fitted in the car conforms with the
EC 98/69 (EURO 3) Directive.
This system continuously monitors the components of the vehicle related to emissions;
it also indicates, when the warning light U
comes on on the instrument panel (together
with the message + symbol shown by the display) that the components in question are inpoor conditions.
The objective is the following:– to keep under control the efficiency ofthe system;– to indicate when a malfunction causes
an increase in the emissions beyond thethreshold established by European regulations;– to indicate the need to replace the deteriorated components.

If, when the ignition key
is turned to MAR, the U
warning light does notcome on or if, when driving, itlights up and emits a fixed light ora flashing one (together with themessage + symbol shown by thedisplay), contact an Alfa Romeo
Authorized Service Station as soon
as possible. The operation of the
U warning light can also bechecked by means of special equipment available to the traffic control officers. Comply with the regulations in force in country where
you drive your car.

The system also has a diagnostic connector, which can be interfaced with adequate instruments, that enables the error codes stored
in the control unit to be read, together witha series of specific parameters concerning theoperation and diagnosis of the engine. This
check can also be made by the traffic control agents.

156

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

IMPORTANT After the problem has beelresolved, to completely check the system,
the Alfa Romeo Authorized Service Stationmust carry out tests on a test bench and, if
necessary, road tests that could be long.

The fixed sound system with CD player
with parametric sound equalizer has been
designed to suit the specific characteristicsof the passenger compartment, with a personalised design that matches the style ofthe dashboard. The sound system instructions for use are described in the attachedsupplement.

SOUND SYSTEMPRESETTING SYSTEM(for versions/markets whereapplicable)
The car, if not delivered with sound system, is fitted with a glove compartment(fig. 153) on the instrument panel.
Sound system presetting system includes
the following:– sound system power cables;– front and rear speaker power cables;– aerial power cable;– sound system housing;

The sound system shall be installed in theproper housing occupied by the glove compartment that can be removed by pressing
the two retaining tabs in the glove compartment: here are the power cables.
If after buying the car you
want to install the soundsystem, contact first Alfa
Romeo Authorised Services whose
qualified personnel, in addition tosuggesting the most suitable devices, will evaluate the overall
electric absorption to safeguard thebattery. Excessive loadless absorption could damage the battery
and lose warranty.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

SOUND SYSTEM– aerial on car roof (where provided).
The wiring diagram is the following (fig.
154):
A0B742m

fig. 153

fig. 154

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0B741m

157

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Connector A

REFUELLING

A1 N.C.
A2 N.C.
A3 N.C.
A4 + 30 (battery-powered)
A5 Aerial power supply
A6 Light

The anti-pollution devices
present on the vehicle impose the use of four-star
unleaded fuel with an octane number (R.O.N.) above 95.

A7 + 15 (key-powered)
A8 Ground
Connector B
B1 RH rear speaker
B2 RH rear speaker
B3 RH front speaker
B4 RH front speaker
B5 LH front speaker
B6 LH front speaker
B7 LH rear speaker

Under no circumstances
should conventional leaded
petrol be used, as thiswould irreparably damage the catalyst. If the tank is accidentally
filled with leaded fuel, even inminute quantities, DO NOT START
THE ENGINE. Do not attempt to dilute the petrol with lead free fuel.
Drain the entire fuel circuit andtank.

B8 LH rear speaker

158

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

In order to prevent the vehicle being filledwith leaded petrol, the diameter of the filler
neck is smaller than the nozzle used onpumps delivering leaded petrol.

If the catalyst is notworking properly, harmful
emissions reach the exhaust, resulting in environment pollution.

The fuel flap is released from inside thecar, raising the front part of the lever (Afig. 155).
The fuel cap (A-fig. 156) has a catchto prevent misplacing it (B) that fastens it
to the flap (C).

IMPORTANT The fuel tank is sealed hermetically and pressure may build up inside.
Any noise of rushing air when the cap is removed is perfectly normal.
IMPORTANT For your safety, make surethat the fuelling pump nozzle is inserted correctly into the housing, before starting theengine.

WARNING
Do not get near the fuelfiller with naked flames or
lit cigarettes: danger of fire.
Also avoid going too near thefiller with the face to avoid inhaling harmful vapours.

In case of need, replace
the fuel cap only with an
original one; otherwise,
the efficiency of the petrol vapour
recovery system could be badly affected.

A0B0044m

fig. 155

A0B0045m

159

fig. 156

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

FUEL CAPGETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

EMERGENCY FLAPOPENING DEVICE
If the lever (A-fig. 155) fails to work,
it is still possible to open the flap by pullingthe cord (A-fig. 157) on the right-handside of the luggage compartment.

ENVIRONMENTAL
PROTECTION
The design and construction of the vehicle have not only been developed with thetraditional aspects of performance and safety in mind, but also take into account the increasingly pressing problems tied to protecting the environment.
The choice of materials, techniques andparticular devices are the result of work
which has made it possible to drastically reduce the harmful effects on the environmentand guarantee respect for the severest international norms.

A0B0388m

160 fig. 157

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

USE OF NON-TOXICMATERIALS
None of the components of the vehicle contains asbestos. The padding and the climate
control system do not contain CFCs which
are held to be responsible for the depletionof the ozone layer.
The colouring agents and the corrosion inhibitors used on the nuts, screws and bolts
do not contain cadmium any more, which
could pollute the atmosphere and water tables.

Trivalent catalytic converter(catalytic silencer)
The exhaust system is fitted with a catalyzer formed of alloys of noble metals. It
is housed in a stainless steel container which
is able to resist the high operating temperatures.
The catalyzer converts the unburnt hydrocarbons, carbon monoxide and nitrogen oxides present in the exhaust gas (even if insmall quantities thanks to the electronic injection and ignition system) into harmlesscompounds.

Lambda probes
The sensors (lambda probe) measures thecontent of oxygen present in the exhaustgas. The signal transmitted by the lambda
probe is use by the injection and ignition
electronic control unit to adjust the air-fuelmixture.

Anti-evaporation system
As it is impossible, even when the engine
is switched off, to prevent the formation offuel vapours, a system has been devised
which “imprisons“ the vapours in a special
activated carbon container.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

EMISSION REDUCING
DEVICESDuring operation of the engine, thesevapours are sucked up and sent to combustion.
WARNING
Due to the high temperatures reached during operation of the catalytic converter, thevehicle should not be parked over
inflammable materials (paper, fuel oils, grass, dry leaves, etc.).

161

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR
STARTING
THE ENGINEIMPORTANT The car is fitted with anelectronic engine lock device. If the engine
fails to start see “Alfa Romeo CODE system“.

In addition to the notes
and specifications given below we recommend that,during the initial period, you do not
drive to full vehicle performance(for example excessive acceleration, long journeys at top speed,
hard braking, etc.).

The ignition switch is fitted with a safety
device which obliges the driver to return theignition key to the STOP position before repeating the starting operation if the engine
does not start immediately.
Similarly, when the engine is running, thedevice prevents the key being moved from
the MAR to the AVV position.

To avoid useless consumption of power andpossible draining the battery, never leave the ignition key
in the MAR position when the engine is not running.

IMPORTANT It is important not to press
the accelerator until the engine has started.
1) Make sure the handbrake is engaged.
2) Move the gear lever to neutral.
3) Fully depress the clutch pedal so thatthe starter motor is not forced to crank the
toothed wheels of the gearbox.
4) Ensure that the systems and electricaldevices, especially if they absorb high quantities of energy (e.g. heated rear windscreen) are switched off.
5) Turn the ignition to the AVV position
and release it as soon as the engine starts.
6) If the engine does not start, return the
key to the STOP position and repeat theoperation.

WARNING
Running the engine in confined areas is extremely
dangerous. The engine consumes
oxygen and produces carbon monoxide which is a highly toxic andlethal gas.

162

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

STARTING OPERATIONIMPORTANT On versions equipped with
Selespeed gearbox, keep the brake pedal
pressed when starting the engine. As thebrake pedal stiffens if it is pressed repeatedly
with the engine off, in this situation, to allow the engine to be started, it is necessary
to increase the pressure exerted on the pedal itself.

WARMING THE ENGINE– Drive off slowly, at medium revs without
accelerating abruptly.
– Do not drive at full performance for the
initial kilometers of the journey, Wait until
the engine coolant temperature is between
50 and 60 °C.

For vehicles equippedwith turbocharger in particular and for other vehicles
in general, revving the engine before switching off should be avoided.
Revving the engine serves no purpose and consumes fuel for no reason. It may also cause damage tothe bearings on the rotor of theturbocharger.

SWITCHING OFF– Release the accelerator pedal and wait
until the engine reaches idle speed.
– Turn the ignition key to the STOP position and switch off the engine.
IMPORTANT After a taxing drive it isbetter to allow the engine to “catch its
breath“ before turning it off by letting it idle to allow the temperature in the engine
compartment to fall.

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR

IMPORTANT If it is difficult to start theengine do not insist with extended attempts
which may damage the catalyzer but contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

IMPORTANT If the engine turns off withthe car on the move, the next time it is started, the Alfa Romeo CODE warning light(¢) may turn on. In this case, check thatswitching off and starting the engine again
with the car stationary, the warning lightstays off. If not, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

163

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR

EMERGENCY STARTING
If the Alfa Romeo CODE system does notrecognise the code transmitted by the ignition key (Alfa Romeo CODE (¢) warning
light on the instrument cluster on glowing
steadily) emergency starting may be carriedout using the code of the CODE card.
For the correct procedure see the chapter“In an emergency“.

Starting by pushing,
towing or running downhill
must absolutely be avoided. These manoeuvres may cause
fuel to flow into the catalyst anddamage it irreparably.

WARNING
Remember that the servobrake and power steering
are not activated until the engine
is started, therefore considerably
greater effort is required on thebrake pedal and steering wheel.

PARKING

SAFE DRIVING

When the vehicle is parked, proceed as follows:In designing your Alfa 156 GTA, Alfa Romeo has worked thoroughly to achieve a vehicle able to offer top levels of safety
to its passengers. However, the behaviourof the driver is still a decisive factor for roadsafety.

– Switch off the engine.
– Engage the handbrake.
– Engage first gear if the car is facing uphillor reverse if the car is facing downhill.
– Turn the front wheels so that the car will
immediately come to a half if the handbrakeslips.

BEFORE DRIVING OFF
To avoid useless consumption of power andpossible draining the battery, never leave the ignition key
in the MAR position when the engine is not running.

WARNING
Never leave children unattended in the car. Always
remove the key from the ignition
when leaving the car and take itwith you.

164

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Below you will find a few simple rules fortravelling safely under different conditions.
You are certainly familiar with many of thembut it is still helpful to read them all carefully.

– Make sure the lights and headlights areworking properly.
– Adjust the seat, steering wheel and rearview mirrors, in order to obtain a correct position for driving.
– Adjust the seat back upright and keep
your head as close as possible to the headrestraint.
– Check that nothing (mats, etc.) can get
under the foot pedals.

– Place any objects in the boot with care
to prevent abrupt braking from throwing
them forwards.
– Avoid heavy meals before a journey. A
light meal will help to keep reflexes ready.
Above all avoid alcohol.
Routinely remember to check:– tyre pressure and conditions;– engine oil level;– engine coolant level and system conditions;

WHEN TRAVELLING– The first rule for safe driving is care.
– Care also means being able to predict
the actions of other road users.
– Strictly respect the traffic regulations in
all countries, especially the speed limits.
– Ensure that both yourself and your passengers are wearing their seat belts, thatchildren are carried with the appropriate
seats and that any animals are in appropriate compartments.
– Long distances should be trackled ingood health.

– brake fluid level;– power steering oil level;

WARNING
Always fasten the front
and rear seat belts including those of any child’s seat. Travelling without seat belts increases the risks of serious injury oreven death in the event of an accident.

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR– Make sure that any child restraint system (seats, cradles, etc.) are correctly fastened on the rear seat.

WARNING
Take care when fitting additional spoilers, alloy
wheels and wheel caps: they might reduce ventilation of thebrakes, thus their efficiency, during
abrupt and repeated braking, orlong downhill slopes.

– windscreen washer fluid level.

WARNING
Driving under the influenceof drugs and/or some medicines is highly dangerous for oneself and for others.

WARNING
Never drive with objects
on the floor in front of thedriver’s seat: they might get stuckunder the pedals making it impossible to accelerate or brake.

165

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

CORRECT USE OF THE CARWARNING
Make sure any mats areappropriate in size: even aslight inconvenience to the braking
system may require a higher pedal
stroke than normal.

WARNING
Water, ice and salt on theroads may deposit on thebrake discs, reducing the effectiveness of the brakes the first timethey are used.

– Do not drive for long periods without abreak. During breaks get out of the vehicle
and move around a bit to shake off thedrowsiness.
– Make sure the air in the passenger compartment is changed constantly.
– Never coast the vehicle downhill withthe engine switched off as this eliminates
the engine braking and power steering effect thus requiring a greater effort on the pedal and steering wheel.

NIGHT DRIVING– Keep headlights and lights clean.

Here are some suggestions for night driving.

– Outside built-up areas take care of animal crossings.

– Drive with particular care: night driving
involves a greater degree of concentration.

DRIVING IN THE RAIN

– Reduce speed, especially on unlit roads.

Rain and wet roads can be dangerous.

– At the first signs of drowsiness stop thecar: continuing the journey is dangerous foryourself and others. Continue driving only
after sufficient rest.

If the road is wet, the traction between
wheel and asphalt is greatly reduced, thusincreasing the stopping distance and decreasing road holding.

– Maintain a greater distance from thevehicle in front than in the day: it is moredifficult to judge the speed of the vehicle
when only the lights can be seen.

Here are few suggestions in the case ofrain:– Ensure that the headlights are correctlyaligned: if they are too low, visibility is reduced and eyesight is tired. If they are toohigh they may cause disturbance to otherroad users.

– If it is raining particularly heavily, visibility is also reduced. In these cases, switch on the dipped headlights even if it is still
daylight so you can be seen more easily.

– Use the main beams only outside builtup areas and only when you are certain that
other drivers are not disturbed by their use.
– When meeting vehicles coming in the
opposite direction, switch off the main
beams and drive with the dipped-beamheadlights on.

166

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine– Reduce speed and keep further backfrom the vehicle in front.

– Do not drive through puddles at speed
and hold on tightly to the wheel if you do:a puddle taken at high speed might cause
you to lose control of the car (“aquaplaning“).

– Routinely check the conditions of thewindscreen wiper blades.
DRIVING IN THE FOG– If fog is very thick, avoid travelling where possible. If travelling with mist, groundfog or the possibility of fog banks:– Drive at moderate speed.
– Also in the day turn on the dipped-beamheadlights, rear fog guards and front fog lights. Do not use the main beam headlights.
IMPORTANT On stretches of road withgood visibility, switch off your rear foglights;
the brightness of these lights could annoy
the people travelling in the cars behind.
– Remember that fog also involves wetasphalt, thus greater difficulty in all types ofmanoeuvres and longer stopping distances.
– Keep well away from the vehicle infront.

– Where possible avoid sudden changes
in speed.
– Possibly avoid overtaking other vehicles.
– If the vehicle is forced to stop (faults,
impossibility to continue due to poor visibility, etc.), firstly try to pull off the road. Thenturn on the hazard warning lights and, if possible the dipped beam headlights. Rythmically sound the horn if you note another car
coming.
MOUNTAIN DRIVING– When driving downhill, use the engine
braking by engaging a low gear, to preventthe brakes from overheating.

DRIVING ON SNOW AND ICE
Here are few suggestions for driving in these conditions:– Keep your speed down.
– On a snowy road, fit winter tyres orsnow chains; see the related paragraphs inthis section.
– Use exhaust brake where possible andavoid abrupt braking.
– Avoid abrupt acceleration and changesof direction.

– Never coast downhill with the engine off
or in neutral and especially not with the ignition key removed.

– During cold weather even apparently dryroads may be covered with occasional patches of ice. Pay great attention therefore
when driving on roads which are in the shade, or where rocks or trees line the road andon which ice may persist.

– Drive at moderate speed and avoid “cutting“ corners.

– Keep further back from the vehicle infront.

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR– Position the ventilation controls for demisting (see chapter “Getting to know yourcar“), to prevent visibility from worsening.

– Remember that overtaking up hill isslower and therefore requires a greater
length of clear road. If you are being overtaken on a hill, move over to enable theother vehicle to pass in safety.

167

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

CORRECT USE OF THE CARDRIVING WITH ABS
The ABS is a part of the braking system
which essentially offers two advantages:
1) It prevents wheel lock-up and consequent skidding in emergency stops, particularly when the road does not offer muchgrip;2) It makes it possible to brake and steer
at the same time so you can avoid unexpected obstacles and direct the car where
you want while braking. The extent to which this can be done will depend on the physical limits of the tyre’s sideways grip.

REDUCING RUNNING
COSTS ANDENVIRONMENTPOLLUTION
Some suggestions which may help you tokeep the running costs of your vehicle down
and lower the amount of toxic emissions released into the atmosphere are given below.
GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS

To make the most of the ABS:

Vehicle maintenance– In emergency braking or when grip islow, a slight pulsing can be felt on the brake
pedal: this means that the ABS has come into action. Do not release the pedal, but continue pressing it to give continuity to thebraking action.

The overall state of the vehicle is an important factor which has a marked influence over fuel consumption and driving comfort
and on the life span of your vehicle. For thisreason care should be taken to maintainyour vehicle by carrying out the necessary
checks and regulations in accordance withspecifications given in the “Scheduled Maintenance Programme“ (see sections... spark
plugs, air cleaner, timing).

– The ABS prevents the wheels fromlocking but it does not increase the physical limits of grip between the asphalt andthe road. Therefore, also with a car fittedwith ABS, keep within a safety distance fromthe vehicle in front and limit speed when approaching bends.
The ABS serves to increase car controllabilty not to go faster.

168

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Tyres
Tyres should be checked at least every four
4 weeks: if the pressure is too low, fuel consumption increases as the resistance to therolling movement of the tyre is higher. In
this state, tyre wear is increased
and vehicle handling suffers which will affect safety.
Unnecessary loads
Do not travel with too much luggage
stowed in the boot. The weight of the vehicle (especially when driving in town) and its
trim greatly affects consumption and stability.

Use the electric devices for the necessary
time only. The heated rear window, supplementary lights, windscreen wipers, heating system blower require large amounts ofenergy and, increasing the request for power
also increases fuel consumption (up to+25% when driving in built-up areas).
Air conditioner
The air conditioner is an additional load
which greatly affects the engine leading tohigher consumption (on average up to+20%). When the temperature outside thevehicle permits it, use the air vents where
possible.
Spoilers
The use of aerodynamic optional extras
which are not certified for the specific useon the vehicle, may reduce the aerodynamic penetration of the vehicle and increase
consumption.

STYLE OF DRIVING
Starting
Do not warm the engine when the vehicle
is stationary or at high or low revs: in thisway the engine will warm up gradually increasing consumption and emissions. You
should drive off slowly straight away avoiding high revs so that the engine will warm
up more quickly.
Unnecessary actions
Avoid revving the engine when stopped attraffic lights or before switching off the engine and avoid doubling the clutch as these actions have no purpose on modern vehicles and serve only to increase consumption
and pollution.

Maximum speed
Fuel consumption increases considerablyas speed increases. For example, when accelerating from 90 to 120 kph, fuel consumption increases by about +30%. Your
speed should be kept as even as possible
and superfluous braking and acceleration
avoided as this increases both consumption
and emissions. A “soft“ way of driving
should be adopted by attempting to anticipate manoeuvres to avoid imminent danger
and to keep a safe distance from the vehicle in front in order to avoid braking sharply.

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR

Electrical devices

Acceleration
Accelerating violently increasing the revs
will greatly affect consumption and emissions: acceleration should be gradual andshould not exceed the maximum torque.

Gear selection
As soon as the traffic and road conditions
allow it, shift to a higher gear. Using a lower
gear to liven up acceleration greatly increases consumption. In the same way, improper use of the higher gears will increase consumption, emissions and wear and tear on
the engine.

169

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

CORRECT USE OF THE CARCONDITIONS OF USE
Cold starting
Short journeys and frequent cold starting
will not enable the engine to reach optimalrunning temperature. It follows therefore
that consumption will be higher (from +15%
to +30% in built-up areas) as will the production of toxic emissions.
Traffic and road conditions
heavy traffic and higher consumption aresynonymous; for example, when driving
slowly with frequent use of lower gears orin large towns where there are numerous
traffic lights.
Winding roads, mountain roads andbumpy roads also have a negative effect on
consumption.
Enforced halts
During prolonged hold-ups (traffic lights,
level crossings) the engine should be switched off.

ECONOMY ANDENVIRONMENTFRIENDLY
DRIVING
Environment protection is one of the principles that guided the development of yourAlfa 156 GTA.
It is not merely by chance that its antipollution devices obtain results far beyond those specified by current regulations.
The environment, however, still needs theutmost care from all of us.
By following few simple rules it is possible
to avoid damage to the environment andvery often at the same time to limit fuel consumption. On this subject we are giving some helpful suggestions to be added to those marked with the #, in various points ofthis manual.
Kindly read them all carefully.

170

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

PROTECTING EMISSION
REDUCING DEVICES
Correct operation of the antipollution devices not only guarantees respect for the environment but also influences car performance. Keeping these devices in goodcondition is therefore the first rule for both
environment-friendly and economy driving.
The first precaution is to closely follow the“Programmed Maintenance Schedule“. For
petrol engines only use unleaded petrol (95RON).
If difficulty with starting is experienced do
not insist with extended attempts. Especiallyavoid bump, tow or coast starts: these may
all damage the catalyst. Only use an auxiliary battery to start the car in an emergency.

When the fuel reserve warning light comeson fill up as soon as possible. A low fuel level may cause an irregular supply to the engine with inevitable increase of the exhaust gas temperature; this would result inserious damage to the catalyst.
Never run the engine, even as a test, with
one or more spark plugs disconnected. Do
not warm the engine at idle speed before
moving off, unless the outside temperature is very low and, in this case too, for no
more than 30 seconds.

WARNING
Do not install other heatguards and do not remove
the existing ones on the catalyst
and exhaust pipe.

WARNING
Do not spray anything on
the catalyst, lambda sensor and exhaust pipe.

WARNING
During normal service thecatalyst reaches high temperatures. Do not therefore park
the car over inflammable materials(grass, dry leaves, pine needles,etc.): fire hazard.

TOWING TRAILERS
The car cannot towing trailers.

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR

If the engine is “not running smoothly“,
when the vehicle is travelling, reduce the request for performance to a minimum andcontact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services assoon as possible.

WARNING
The failure to follow these rules may cause a fire
hazard.

171

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR

WINTER TYRES
These tyres are specially designed for driving on snow and ice, to be fitted in placeof the existing tyres.
Use snow tyres of the same size as the normal tyres provided with the car.
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services will beglad to provide advice concerning the mostsuitable type of tyre for the customer’s requirements.

IMPORTANT When snow tyres are usedwith a max. speed index below the one thatcan be reached by the car (increased by 5%),place a notice in the passenger compartment,
plainly in the driver’s view which states themax. permissible speed of the snow tyres (asper EC Directive).
All four tyres should be the same (brand andtrack) to ensure greater safety when driving
and braking and better driveability.
Remember that it is inappropriate to change the direction of rotation of tyres.

For the type of tyre to be used, inflationpressures and the specifications of snow tyres, follow the instructions given in chapter“Technical specifications“.
The winter features of these tyres are reduced considerably when the tread depth
is below 4 mm. In this case, they should be
replaced. Due to the snow tyre features, under normal conditions of use or on long motorway journeys, the performance of thesetyres is lower than that of normal tyres.
It is therefore necessary to limit their use to
the purposes for which they are certified.

WARNING
The max. speed for snow
tyres with “Q“ marking is
160 km/h; 190 km/h for tyres
with “T“ marking and 210 km/h
for tyres with “H“ marking. The
Road Traffic Code speed limits must however be always strictly observed.

172

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

SNOW CHAINS
Use of snow chains should be in compliance with local regulations.
Use snow chains with reduced size withmax. protrusion beyond the tyre profile of
12 mm.
Snow chains may not be
used on tyres type225/45 ZR 17". Only spider type chains can be used on tyres type 215/45 R17” and215/45 ZR17”. SPIKES SPIDERCOMPACT snow chains (17003
compact model) with 9 arms and
16 mm adjustable length and 17"
wheel cover adapter are available
at Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo. Keepyour speed down when this typeof chains is fitted. Do not exceed
50 km/h with this type of chains,
avoid sudden acceleration anddeactivate the ASR system (thewarning light on the button shallbe on). Remember that snow
chains make braking distance longer.

VEHICLE INACTIVITY– Clean and protect the shiny metal parts
using special compounds readily available.

Alfa Romeo Authorized Services should first be contacted before purchasing or using
snow chains.

If the car is to be left inactive for long periods, the following precautions should be
noted:– Sprinkle talcum powder on the rubber
windscreen and rear window wiper blades
and lift them off the glass.

Check the tension of the chains after the
first few metres have been driven.

– House the vehicle under cover in a dry
and possibly ventilated place.

– Slightly open the windows.

– Engage a gear.
Keep your speed
down when snow
chains are fitted.
Do not exceed 50 km/h. Avoid
potholes, steps and pavements andavoid also to drive for long distances on roads not covered withsnow to prevent damaging the car
and the roadbed.

– Check that the handbrake is not engaged.

– Cover the car with a cloth or perforated plastic sheet. Do not use sheets of nonperforated plastic as they do not allow moisture on the car body to evaporate.

– Clean and protect the painted parts
using protective wax.

– Inflate the tyres to 0.5 bar above thenormal specified pressure and check it at intervals.

– Disconnect the negative terminal (–)
and check the battery charge. This check is
to be repeated every three months. Recharge if the optical indicator shows a darkcolour without the central green area.

– If you don’t disconnect the battery fromthe electric system, check its charge every
month and recharge it if the optical indicator shows a dark colour without the central
green area.

IMPORTANT Switch off the electronic
car alarm with the remote control.

– Do not drain the engine cooling system.

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR

Snow chains should only be applied to thedriving wheels (front wheels).

173

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

CORRECT USE OF THE CARREMOVING FROM STORAGE– Check the state of the drive belts.

Before using your vehicle after a long period of inactivity, the following operations
should first be carried out:

– Reconnect the battery negative terminal (–) after checking that the charge isadequate.

– Do not dust the outside of the vehicle.

– With the gear lever in neutral start theengine and allow the engine to run for a few
seconds whilst repeatedly working the clutch pedal.

– Visually check that there are no leaks(oil, brake and clutch fluid, engine coolant,etc.).

USEFUL ACCESSORIESIn addition to the legal requirements, werecommend keeping the following in the car(fig. 1):– first aid kit with non-alcoholic base disinfectant, steril gauzes, a roll of gauze, plasters, etc.;– Replace engine oil and filter.

– torch;– Check:- brake-clutch fluid level- level of engine coolant fluid.

– round-ended scissors;– Check the air cleaner and replace if necessary.
– Check tyre pressure and ensure that they
are not damaged, cracked or cut. If they are
they must be replaced.

– work gloves.
WARNING
This operation must be
performed in the open. The
exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide which is extremely toxic
and may also be lethal.
A0B0389m

174

fig. 1

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

EMERGENCY
STARTING
If the Alfa Romeo CODE system is not able
to deactivate the engine inhibitor, warning
lights ¢ and U remain lit and the engine
cannot be started. To start the engine it isnecessary to follow the emergency starting
procedure.
IMPORTANT You are advised to carefully read the entire procedure before carrying it out.

3) Fully depress the accelerator pedal andkeep it pressed. The warning light U will
come on for eight seconds approximately
and will then go out; now release the accelerator pedal.
4) The warning light U begins to flash:after it has flashed for the same number oftimes as the first digit on the code of thecard, press completely and hold down theaccelerator pedal until the warning light U
comes on (for 4 seconds) and then goes out
again; now release the accelerator pedal.

If a mistake is made during the emergency
procedure, the ignition key should be turned
to STOP and the operations must be repeated from the start (point 1).

5) The warning light U will begin toflash: after it has flashed for the same number of times as the second digit on the codeof the card, press completely and hold down
the accelerator pedal.

1) Read the 5-figure electronic code on
the CODE card.

6) Repeat this procedure in the same way
for the other digits on the CODE card code.

2) Turn the ignition key to the MAR position.

7) After entering the last figure, keep theaccelerator pedal pressed. The warning light
U turns on (for four seconds) and then goes
off; now release the accelerator pedal.

8) A quick flash of the warning light U(for appr. 4 seconds) confirms that the operation has taken place correctly.
9) Start the car turning the ignition key
from the MAR position to the AVV position without returning the key to the STOP
position.

IN AN EMERGENCY

IN AN EMERGENCY

Conversely, if the warning light U stays
on, turn the ignition key to STOP and repeat the procedure starting from point 1).
IMPORTANT After emergency starting
it is advisable to turn to an Alfa Romeo Authorized Service, because the procedure described must be repeated each time the engine is started.

175

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

IN AN EMERGENCY

STARTING WITH
AN AUXILIARY BATTERY
If the battery is flat (for battery with optical hydrometer: dark in colour with nogreen area in the centre), the engine can bestarted using another battery of the sameor a little higher capacity than the flat one.

IMPORTANT Do not directly connect thenegative terminals of the two batteries: any
sparks may set fire to the gas that may bereleased from the battery. If the auxiliary
battery in installed on another car, no metal part shall accidentally come into contact
with this car and the one with the flat battery.

This is what you should do fig. 1:

3) Start the engine.

1) Remove the protecting cover on thebattery positive pole by pressing the relatedside wings (front side), then connect thepositive terminals (plus sign + next to theterminal) of the two batteries with a special
cable.

4) When the engine is running remove thecables in reverse order.

2) Connect a second cable to the negative
terminal (–) of the auxiliary battery withan earth point E on the engine or the gearbox of the car to be started.

A0B0181m

If after a few attempts the engine does notstart, do not insist but contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

Never use a quick battery
charger to start the engine
in an emergency as this
could damage the electronic systems of your vehicle, particularly
the control units which manage thestarting and supply functions.

176 fig. 1

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

WARNING
This starting proceduremust be carried out by qualified personnel as incorrect operations may provoke electrical discharge of great intensity. The liquidcontained in the battery is toxic andcorrosive. Avoid contact with skinand eyes. Keep naked flame andlighted cigarettes away from thebattery. Do not cause sparks.

The battery terminal connecting and disconnecting
operations generate current that may cause problems to
the car’s electronic systems. Therefore, this operation should be carried out by skilled personnel.

Never push, tow or coast
start the vehicle. This could
cause fuel to flow into thecatalyst damaging it irreversibly.

IN THE EVENT OF
A PUNCTURE
IMPORTANT The car is equipped with“Kit for tyre quick repair Fix&Go“, see theinstructions contained in the following chapter.

WARNING
Remember that the engine
brake and power steering
are not operational until the engine
is started, therefore, much greater
effort than usual is needed on thebrake pedal and steering wheel.

WARNING
Signal the presence of thestationary vehicle according to the current regulations: hazard warning lights, reflecting triangle, etc. Any passengers should
leave the car.

IN AN EMERGENCY

STARTING BY INERTIAWARNING
Should the type of wheels
used be changed (alloyrims instead of steel), it is also necessary to replace the complete kitof fastening bolts with others ofsuitable size.

177

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

IN AN EMERGENCY

FIX&GO KIT FOR
QUICK TYREREPAIRING

The quick repairing kit includes (fig. 11):
– a tool (A) to remove the valve body;– a compressor (B) with pressure gauge
and fittings;

The quick repairing kit is placed in the bootinside the appropriate container (A-fig. 10).

A0B0390m

A0B0332m

fig. 11

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine– a “spout“ (D) to be connected to thefilling pipe;– a sticker bearing the notice “max 80
km/h“, to be placed in a position visible
to the driver (on the instrument panel) after fixing the tyre.

The car is equipped with a tyre quick repairing kit called FIX&GO.

178 fig. 10– a bottle (C) containing sealer and fitted with a filling pipe;In fig. 12 it is possible to identify:
A - tyre area which can be fixed (holes
or cracks with diameter of max 4 mm);WARNING
It is not possible to fix
cracks on the tyre sides
and permanent sealing of cracks on
the tread within 25 mm from thetyre side is not guaranteed.

WARNING
Do not use the quick repairing kit if the tyre isdamaged due to driving with thewheel flattened. That it is why it
is necessary to check accurately thetyre sides.

B - areas which CANNOT be fixed.

IN AN EMERGENCYIMPORTANT In the event of a puncturecaused by foreign bodies, it is possible to fix
tyres having cracks with maximum diameter up to 4 mm.

A0B0333m

WARNING
In case of damages to thewheel rim (the deformation is such that there is an air leakage) or the tyre outside the limit areas previously indicated, fixing is
not possible. Do not remove foreign
bodies (screws or nails) which havepenetrated the tyre.

179

fig. 12

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

IN AN EMERGENCYWARNING
Warning! The bottle (C-fig.
11) contains propylene glycol. This substance is toxic: do not
swallow it and avoid contact withthe eyes, the skin and the clothes.
In case of contact, rinse with abundant water. If any allergy reaction
should take place call a medical doctor. Keep the bottle in the appropriate compartment away fromheat and children.

IT IS NECESSARYTO KNOW THAT:WARNING
Do not operate the compressor for more than 20
minutes: risk of overheating!
The sealer included in the quick repairing
kit, good for temperatures between –30°C
and +80°C, is not adequate for permanent
fixing.
The liquid inside the tyre can be easily removed with water.

INFLATING PROCEDURE(fig. 13-14-15-16-17-18-19)– Place the wheel in the position illustrated
in the figure (A) for the operation with thevalve, then engage the handbrake.
– Screw the filling pipe (B) to the bottle(C).
– Unscrew the tyre valve plug, remove theelement inside the valve by using the appropriate tool (D); be careful not to place iton the sand or on a dirty surface.
– Introduce the filling pipe (B) in the tyrevalve, keep the bottle (C) with the pipe directed downwards, then press the bottle sothat the whole sealer can get into the tyre.

The sealer has no expire date.

A0B0422m

180

fig. 13

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

– Use the appropriate lever (E) to insert
and clamp the air compressor pipe (F) tothe tyre valve.
– Start the engine, insert the plug (G)in the lighter (or current socket, where fitted) and inflate the tyre according to theright pressure value (see “Cold inflation pressures“ in the “Technical specifications“ chapter). You are advised to check the tyre pressure value on the pressure gauge (H) withthe compressor off, in order to have a moreaccurate reading.

If it is not possible to reach the prescribedpressure, move the car forwards or backwards for about 10 metres, so that the sealer is distributed inside the tyre, then repeat
inflation.
If, in spite of the last operation, the prescribed pressure is not achieved, do not
move the vehicle and contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services.
Once the correct tyre pressure has beenreached, start driving immediately so thatthe sealer is distributed evenly inside thetyre.

A0B0335m

fig. 14After about 10 minutes, stop and checkthe tyre pressure once again; remember toengage the handbrake.

A0B0423m

fig. 15

A0B0424m

fig. 16

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

WARNING
Place the sticker in a position where it can be clearly seen by the driver as a noticethat the tyre has been treated with
the quick repairing kit. Drive carefully especially in a bend. Do not
overcome 80 km/h. Avoid sudden
acceleration or braking.

IN AN EMERGENCY– Screw again the element inside thevalve with the tool (D).

181

IN AN EMERGENCYWARNING
If the pressure is below
1.3 bars, do not drive any
further: the quick repairing kit cannot guarantee proper hold because
the tyre is too much damaged. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
Conversely, if at least 1.3 bars aredetected, restore the correct pressure (with the engine running andthe handbrake engaged) and startdriving the car with great care.

WARNINGIf, during the pressure
restoring operation, it is
not possible to reach at least 1.8
bars, do not drive any further because the tyre is too much damaged and the quick repairing kit
cannot guarantee proper hold. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

A0B0426m

fig. 18

A0B0391m

fig. 19

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

It is absolutely necessary to communicatethat the tyre has been fixed with the quick
repairing kit.

WARNING
Tyres fixed with the quick
repairing kit must be used
only temporarily.

A0B0425m

182 fig. 17

Drive carefully to the nearest Alfa Romeo
Authorized Service to check the tyre conditions, then have it fixed or replaced.

WARNING
Alterations or repairs to
the electric system not carried out correctly and without taking into account the specificationsof the system may cause malfunctioning and the risk of fire.

WARNING
Where possible the bulbs
should be replaced by Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services. The
correct operation and positioningof the external lights are vital to
the safety of the vehicle and its
passengers and the subject of specific laws.

WARNING
Halogen bulbs must be
handled touching only themetallic part. If the transparent
bulb is touched with the fingers its
lighting intensity is reduced and thelife of the bulb may be compromised. If touched accidentally, rub
the bulb with a cloth moistenedwith methylated spirits and allow

WARNING
Possible replacement of alight on vehicles equippedwith Xenon lamps must be carriedout by Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

IN AN EMERGENCY

WHEN NEEDING TO CHANGE A BULBWARNING
Halogen bulbs containpressurised gas, in the caseof breakage they may burst.

183

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

IN AN EMERGENCY

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONSTYPES OF BULBS (fig. 20)– When a light is not working check thecorresponding fuse is intact before replacing
the bulb.

Various types of bulbs are fitted to your vehicle:– For the location of fuses, refer to theparagraph “In the event of a burnt fuse“in this chapter.

A.

All glass bulbs
They are pressure-fitted. Pull to remove.

B.

Bayonet type bulbs
Press the bulb, turn counter-clockwise
to remove this type of bulb from its
holder.

C.

Tubular bulbs
Free them from their contacts to remove.

– Before changing a bulb check the contacts for oxidation.
– Burnt bulbs must be replaced with others of the same type and power.
– Always check the height of the headlightbeam after changing a bulb to ensure they
are safe.

D.

A0B0233m

IMPORTANT On the inside surface ofthe headlight there could appear a slightcoat of fogging; this does not show a defect,
since it is a natural occurrence due to lowtemperature and to the degree of humidity
in the air; it will soon disappear as soon as
the lights are turned on. The presence ofdrops inside the headlight shows water seepage, refer to an Alfa Romeo Authorized
Service.

184

fig. 20

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Halogen bulbs
To remove free it from the clip on its
seating.

FIGURE 20

TYPE

POWER

High beam

D

H1

55W

Low beam

D

H7

55W

Front sidelight

B

H6W

6W

Foglight

D

H1

55W

Front direction indicator

B

PY21W

21W

Side direction indicator

A

W5W

5W

Rear direction indicator

B

P21W

21W

Stop/side lightB

P21/5W

21W/5W

Additional stop light

B

3.2W

3.2

Reversing light

A

P21W

21W

Rear fog guard

B

P21W

21W

Number plate light

B

W5W

5W

Front roof light

A

C10W

10W

Boot light

C

C10W

10W

Rear roof light

C

C5W

5W

Courtesy light

C

C5W

5W

Glovebox light

C

C5W

5W

IN AN EMERGENCY

BULBS

185

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

IN AN EMERGENCYIF ONE OF THE
EXTERNAL LIGHTS
GOES OUTWARNING
Alterations or repairs to
the electric system not carried out correctly and without taking into account the specificationsof the system may cause malfunctioning and the risk of fire.

FRONT LIGHT UNITS
The front light units contain the direction
indicators, side lights/dipped and main
beam light bulbs.

When the bulbs havebeen replaced refit the cover in the correct position
turning clockwise and ensuring thatit clicks into place.

To replace these bulbs the cover must be
removed turning counter-clockwise.
The bulbs are arranged inside the lightunits as follows (fig. 21):
A. Direction indicators

Fig. 22: Dipped beam headlights with
Xenon lamp

B. Dipped beam headlights

A. Sidelight/main beam headlights

C. Sidelight/main beam headlights

B. Dipped beam headlights/sidelight

IMPORTANT For the type and power ofthe light refer to what described in the previous chapter “When needing to change abulb“.
A0B0224m

186

fig. 21

fig. 22

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0B0392m

Xenon lights have a very long life, therefore breakdowns are unlikely.

WARNINGAny operation regarding
the front light units must
be carried out with the lights
turned off and the ignition key removed from the ignition switch:risk of electric discharges.

– Rotate the connector (B-fig. 24) of the
Xenon lamp by a quarter of a turn counterclockwise, as indicated in (fig. 25) and remove it.

Dipped-beam headlamps
WARNINGIf necessary, have the system checked and repaired
only by Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services.

A0B0349m

To replace the bulb proceed as follows:– Unscrew the three locking screw(B-fig. 23) and remove the protective (A)cover.

Hereafter you find the description of thecorrect procedure to replace a Xenon light.

fig. 24
A0B0348m

fig. 23

A0B0351m

fig. 25

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

IN AN EMERGENCYREPLACEMENT OFXENON LIGHTS(optional for versions/markets
where applicable)187

IN AN EMERGENCY

The Xenon lamp must be
handled touching only themetallic part. If the transparent bulb is touched with the fingers, rub it with a clean clothmoistened with methylated spirits and allow to dry before refitting the bulb.

– Turn ring (A-fig. 26) counterclockwise
and remove it.
– Remove the Xenon lamp (B-fig. 26).
– Fit the new bulb by placing it so that thenotch matches the groove on its housing.
– Refit the protective cover correctly(A-fig. 23).

Main beam headlamps
To replace the bulb proceed as follows:– Turn the protective cover counter-clockwise (C-fig. 23) in order to reach the highbeam headlight bulb (A-fig. 24).
– Remove connector (A-fig. 27) and remove the bulb operating the clips (B) as
shown in the figure.
– Fit the new bulb.
– Refit the protective cover correctly(C-fig. 23).

IMPORTANT Once the operation has
been completed, turn dipped beam headlamps on and check that the headlight lens
moves when positioning the light itself. If
not, re-engage the light aiming motor to thelens as previously described.

A0B0352m

188

fig. 26

fig. 27

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0B0350m

Direction indicators

To replace the bulb proceed as follows:

To replace the bulb proceed as follows:– Turn the protective cover (C-fig. 23)
counter-clockwise in order to reach the sidelight bulb.

– Turn the cover counter-clockwise(A-fig. 29).

To replace the bulb (orange colour), proceed as follows:– Turn the bulb holder (B) counter-clockwise.

– Turn the bulb holder counter-clockwise(A-fig. 30) and remove it.

– Remove the bulb from the bulb holder,pushing lightly and turning counter-clockwise.

– Remove the bulb (B-fig. 31) from thebulb holder (A-fig. 31), pushing lightly andturning counter-clockwise.

– Replace the bulb and refit the bulb holder in its housing.

– Replace the bulb (B-fig. 31).

– Remove the bulb (A-fig. 28) from thebulb holder (B), pushing lightly and turning
counter-clockwise.
– Replace the bulb and refit the bulb holder (B-fig. 28) in its housing.
– Refit the protective cover correctly(C-fig. 23).

A0B0354m

fig. 28

A0B0353m

fig. 29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0B0225m

fig. 30

AlfaWiki.nl

IN AN EMERGENCYFRONT DIRECTION
INDICATORS

Sidelights

189

IN AN EMERGENCY– Refit the bulb holder (A-fig. 31) bymaking its notches coincide with the grooves
in the headlight unit body and turn it clockwise.

DIPPED-BEAM HEADLAMPS(fig. 32)

FRONT FOG LIGHTS

To replace the bulb proceed as follows:– Remove the protective cover– Disconnect the electrical connector (A).
– Release the bulb catch (B).
– Withdraw the bulb and replace it.
– Fit the new bulb making the tabs of themetallic part coincide with the grooves in theheadlamp lens and hook the bulb catch (B).
– Reconnect the electrical connector (A).
– Refit the protective cover correctly.

A0B0221m

190 fig. 31– Loosen the screw (A-fig. 33) and remove the protection cover (B).
– Release catch (C-fig. 34) and disconnect connector(D) from the light unit.
– Turn cover (E) counterclockwise and remove it.
– Withdraw the supply cable terminal (Ffig. 35).
– Release the bulb stopper (G) and remove the bulb.

A0B0222m

fig. 32

A0B0319m

fig. 33

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

To replace the bulb proceed under the car
as follows:To adjust the front foglights contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services.

– Remove the bulb holder (B-fig. 36)
which is snap-fitted.

– Refit cover (E-fig. 34) and reconnect
connector (D-fig. 34) to the light unit.

– Remove the bulb (C-fig. 37)from thebulb holder, pushing lightly and turning
counter-clockwise.
WARNINGThe efficiency of the lights
will be decreased and may
inconvenience other road users if
the light units are not correctly adjusted. If in doubt contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services tohave them checked and adjusted if
necessary.

A0B0328m– Replace the bulb and refit the bulb holder (B-fig. 37) in its housing.
– Refit the protective cover correctly (Afig. 36).

A0B0355m

fig. 35

A0B0217m

fig. 36

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

To replace the bulb proceed as follows:– Remove the protective cover (A-fig.
36).

– Refit the supply cable terminal (F-fig.
35).

fig. 34

FRONT SIDELIGHTSIN AN EMERGENCY– Fit a new bulb making the tabs of themetallic part coincide with the grooves in thelamp lens and hook the bulb stopper (Gfig. 35).

191

IN AN EMERGENCY

MAIN-BEAM HEADLAMPS(fig. 38)
To replace the bulb proceed as follows:– Remove the protective cover.
– Release the clip holding the bulb (A).

– Fit the new bulb making the tabs of themetallic part coincide with the grooves in theheadlamp lens.
– Lock the bulb in place with the clip (A).
– Refit the protective cover correctly.

– Withdraw the power supply (B) cableconnector.

SIDE DIRECTION INDICATORSTo replace the bulb proceed as follows:– Push the transparent cover towards therear of the car to compress the tab (Afig. 39). Release the front part and remove the unit.
– Turn the bulb holder counter-clockwise(B-fig. 40) and remove it from the transparent cover (D-fig. 40).

– Remove and (C) replace the bulb.
– Reconnect the power cable (B) to thebulb.

A0B0218m

192 fig. 37

A0B0223m

fig. 38

fig. 39

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0B0219m

–Insert the bulb holder (B-fig. 40) in
the transparent cover (D-fig. 40) and position the unit ensuring that the clip clicks into place (A-fig. 39).

REAR LIGHT UNITS
Rear light units contain the reversing lights,
rear fog guards, direction indicators, number plate lights, stop/side lights and the additional stop light (3rd stop).
REVERSING LIGHTSAND REAR FOG GUARDS

Take care not to damage
the bodywork or the transparent cover when removing the side direction indicator unit.

To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:(D) reversing light bulb

– Slacken the screws (A or B-fig. 41)
fastening the boot trim in correspondencewith the light concerned.

A0B0211m

fig. 41

A0B0212m

fig. 42

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine– Remove and replace the spherical typebulb with bayonet attachment pushing it
gently and turning counter-clockwise (fig.
43):(E) rear fog guard bulb.

– Open the boot.

A0B0220m

fig. 40– Lower the boot lid trim in the corresponding area and remove the bulb holder
unit (C-fig. 42) releasing the retainer tab(B-fig. 42).

IN AN EMERGENCY– Withdraw the bulb (C-fig. 40) which
is of the pressure-fitted type and replace it.

193

IN AN EMERGENCY– Refit the bulb holder unit fastening it correctly in place with the retainer tabs (Bfig. 42).
– Refit the boot trim fastening it with thescrews removed previously.

To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:– Remove and replace the bulb concerned(spherical with bayonet coupling) pushingit gently and turning counter-clockwise (fig.
46).

– Open the boot.

(C) side light/stop light bulb

– Slacken the two fastening screws (Afig. 44) and remove the protective cover(B-fig. 44).

(D) direction indicator bulb.

DIRECTION INDICATORS/SIDELIGHTS AND STOP LIGHTS– Withdraw the bulb holder unit (Afig. 45) releasing the retainer tabs (Bfig. 45).

A0B0213m

194 fig. 43– Refit the protective cover (B-fig. 44)
fastening with nuts (A-fig. 44).

A0B0214m

fig. 44

A0B0207m

fig. 45

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine– Refit the bulb holder unit fastening it correctly in place with the retainer tabs (B-fig.
45).

To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:– Remove the number plate light unit using a flat screwdriver protected by a soft
cloth on the stopper (A-fig. 47).

– Refit the bulb holder (C-fig. 48) turning gently.

ADDITIONAL STOP LIGHT(3rd STOP)– Refit the complete unit (B-fig. 47)
firstly inserting the catches and then pressing in correspondence with the stopper (Afig. 47).

To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:– Open the boot.

– Remove the unit (B-fig. 47).

– Turn the fastening buttons (A-fig. 49)
until they release and lower the trim.

– remove the bulb holder (C-fig. 48)
turning lightly and replace the bulb (Dfig. 48) which is pressure-fitted.

– Slacken the knob (B-fig. 50)and withdraw the complete unit.
A0B0209m

IN AN EMERGENCYNUMBER PLATE LIGHTS– Slacken the screws (C-fig. 51).
– Remove the transparent cover (Dfig. 52) and replace the bulb concerned.

fig. 47
A0B0208m

fig. 46

A0B0210m

fig. 48

fig. 49

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0B0192m

195

IN AN EMERGENCY– Refit the transparent cover and install
the unit locking it with the knob (Bfig. 50).
– Re-position the trim correctly and fasten
with its buttons (A-fig. 49).

IF ONE OF THE
INTERNAL LIGHTS
GOES OUT

To refit the rooflight reverse the procedure
followed for removal.

FRONT ROOF LIGHT
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
A0B0204m– Remove the roof light (A-fig. 53) levering in the points shown by the arrows.

When
refittingtherooflight ensure that theelectrical wiring is correctly arranged and does not interferewith the edges of the light or retaining clips.

– Open the cover (B-fig. 54).
– Replace the bulb concerned (Cfig. 54) by pulling it outwards and freeing
it from the lateral contacts ensuring that the
new bulb is correctly fitted between the contacts.

fig. 50
A0B0205m

196 fig. 51

A0B0206m

fig. 52

fig. 53

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0B0200m

To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:– Remove the rooflight (A-fig. 55) levering in the point shown by the arrow.

– Fit the new bulb making sure that it ispositioned correctly and locked between thecontacts.

CENTRE REAR ROOF LAMP
(only versions with sunroof)– Refit the light firstly inserting the sidewith the connector and then pressing on theother side until the catch clocks into place.

– Remove the rooflight (A-fig. 57) levering in the point shown by the arrow.

– Remove the bulb (B-fig. 56) pullingoutwards and releasing it from the side contacts.

To remove the bulb proceed as follows:– Remove the bulb (B-fig. 58) pullingoutwards and releasing it from the side contacts.
A0B0202m

IN AN EMERGENCY

REAR ROOFLIGHT BULBS(except versions with sunroof)– Fit the new bulb making sure that it ispositioned correctly and locked between thecontacts.
– Refit the roof light firstly inserting theside (C-fig. 58) and then pressing on theother side until the catch clicks into place.

fig. 55
A0B0201m

fig. 54

A0B0203m

fig. 56

fig. 57

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0B0196m

197

IN AN EMERGENCY

COURTESY LIGHT
To remove the bulb proceed as follows:– Refit the roof light, inserting it in the correct position firstly on one side and thenpressing on the other until the tab clicks.

GLOVEBOX LIGHT
To remove the bulb proceed as follows:– Remove the roof light (A-fig. 59) levering in the point shown by the arrow.

– Remove the light pushing with a screwdriver on the tab (A-fig. 61).

– Remove the bulb (B-fig. 60) pulling
it outwards and releasing it from the side
contacts.

– Remove the cover (B-fig. 62).

– Fit the new bulb making sure that it ispositioned correctly and locked between thecontacts.

A0B0198m

fig. 59

fig. 61

A0B0197m

198 fig. 58

A0B0199m

fig. 60

A0B0194m

fig. 62

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0B0195m

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT
LIGHT– Refit the cover (B-fig. 62).

To remove the bulb proceed as follows:– Re-install the light inserting it in the correct position firstly on one side and thenpushing on the other until the tab clicks.

– Open the boot.
– Turn the fastening buttons (A-fig. 64)
until they click and lower the trim.

– Replace the bulb (B-fig. 66)of thecylindrical type pulling it outwards ensuringthat the new bulb is correctly positioned between the contacts.
– Refit the transparent cover ensuring thatthe retaining tabs click into place (Cfig. 66).

– Withdraw the clear plastic cover andbulb (A-fig. 65) using a flat-bladed screwdriver.

IN AN EMERGENCY– Change the bulb (C-fig. 63) which
is pressure-fitted.

A0B0191m

fig. 65
A0B0193m

fig. 63

A0B0192m

fig. 64

fig. 66

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0B0190m

199

IN AN EMERGENCY

IN THE EVENT OF A BURNT FUSE
GENERAL(A) - Intact fuse

The fuse (fig. 67) is a protective elementof the electrical system: basically it operates(i.e. it gets disconnected) in case of breakdown or wrong operation on the system.

(B) - Fuse with broken filament.

When an electrical devices ceases to function, make sure it has not fused. The filament must not be broken: if so, replace theburnt fuse with another of the same value(same colour).

A0B0189m

Extract the fuse to be replaced using the pincers (C)situated on the fuse box.

Never replace a broken
fuse with anything otherthan a new fuse. Use always an intact fuse of the same
colour.

WARNING
Before replacing a fusecheck that the key has
been removed from the ignition
and that all the services are
switched off and/or disengaged.

WARNING
Never replace a fuse withanother with a higher amp
rating, DANGER OF FIRE!

WARNING
If a fuse blows again contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

200 fig. 67

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

WARNING
If a main protective fuse
(MAXI-FUSE o MEGA-FUSE)
intervenes, do not fix it but contact
an Alfa Romeo Authorized Service.

FUSE AND RELAYS IN THE
MAIN FUSEBOX (fig. 70)

A. Dipped beam light relay

The fuses for the main devices are housed
in a control unit under the dashboard, to theleft of the steering column.
To gain access to them , remove the panel (A) releasing the tabs (B) in the direction of the arrow below and unlock thescrew (C).

A0B0188m

A0B0172m

B. Relay for sunroof , seat heater, rear window power control, seat electric adjustment.
The symbols that identify the main electriccomponent protected by each fuse, areshown on the label (fig. 71) on the inner side of the panel (A-fig. 70).
Some spare fuses are housed at the rightof the control unit (D-fig. 70); you are advised to replenish the stock of spare fuses
when they are used.

IN AN EMERGENCY

The general protection fuses of Alfa
156 GTA are in the engine compartment, inside a container near the battery
positive terminal; to gain access to the fuses lift the two lids (fig. 68 and fig. 69).

fig. 68
A0B0189m

fig. 69

A0B0185m

fig. 70

fig. 71

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

201

IN AN EMERGENCYFUSES ABOVE THE
MAIN FUSEBOX (fig. 72)
The protection fuses of certain devices aregrouped together on three containers locatedabove the main fusebox to which access isgained removing the panel (A-fig. 70).

To gain access to the fuses remove(A-fig. 73) the pressure-fitted lid.

FUSES AND RELAYSACCESSIBLE
FROM THE GLOVEBOX
Some fuses and relays for services supplied
on request or only for certain specific market versions are located on a bracket behind
the glovebox.

A0B0184m

A0B0141m

202 fig. 72

fig. 73

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Access to the relays is gained by removing
the glovebox: contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
A. Fog light relay.
B. Headlamp washer timer.

Remove the cover (A-fig. 74) to gain
access to the following relays (fig. 75):

In the engine compartment, housed on abracket in front of the battery and protected by a special cover, there is a variable
number of fuses and relays depending on
the versions.

A. Engine radiator cooling fan 2nd speed
relay.

IMPORTANT The arrangement of thefuses and relays may vary depending on theversions and markets. In the event of a suspected anomaly, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

B. Engine radiator cooling fan 1st speed relay.
C. Fuel pump relay

A0B0430m

203

fig. 75

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

F. Engine radiator fan 2nd speed relay.

D. Electronic injection relay

A0B0154m

fig. 74

E. Climate control compressor relay

IN AN EMERGENCYFUSES AND RELAYSIN ENGINE BAY

IN AN EMERGENCYFUSE SUMMARY TABLE
LIGHTSFUSE

AMPERAGE

FIGURE

Left front side light

7

10A

70

Right front side light

6

10A

70

Left rear side light

6

10A

70

Right rear side light

7

10A

70

Left dipped-beam headlamp/Xenon lamps (optional)

8

20A

70

Right dipped-beam headlamp/Xenon lamps (optional)

4

20A

70

Left main-beam headlamp

2

10A

70

Right main-beam headlamp

1

10A

70

Cruise Control (optional)

13

10A

70

Left number plate light

7

10A

70

Right number plate light

6

10A

70

Reversing lights/Sound system

13

10A

70

Left rear fog guard

7

10A

70

Right rear fog guard

6

10A

70

Direction indicators - Hazard warning lights

14

10A

70

Fog lamps

16

15A

72

Car interior and glovebox lights

12-13

10A

70

9

25A

72

HI-FI BOSE system

204

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

FUSE

AMPERAGE

FIGURE

Windscreen wiper, windscreen washer/Rearscreen wiper/Rain sensor (optional)

10

20A

70

Horns

11

20A

70

GSM Box for Connect/Navigator-electronic warning system

13

10A

70

Front power windows

5

30A

70

Left rear power window

4

20A

72

Right rear power window

5

20A

72

Door locking system - Boot light

3

20A

70

Boot electric opening

7

30A

72

Rearscreen heating

15

30A

70

Wing mirror adjustment

13

10A

70

Wing mirror defrosting

15

30A

70

Cigar lighter/Odour sensor

9

15A

70

Headlamp washer

1

20A

73

Headlamp aiming device

4

10A

70

Instrument cluster

12

10A

70

Main-beam headlamp warning light

2

10A

70

Rearscreen heating warning light

15

30

70

IN AN EMERGENCYSERVICES

205

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

IN AN EMERGENCYSERVICES

FUSE

AMPERAGE

FIGURESound system/Diagnosis socket

12

10A

70

Electronic alarm system

12

10A

70

Supplementary electrical socket in the boot (Sportwagon versions)

10

20A

72

Remote control

13

10A

70

Controls lighting/Stop lights

3

10A

72

Rear control lighting from sidelights

6

10A

72

Seat heating/Sunroof/Seat electrical adjustment

8

30A

72

Air bag system

2 (*)

10A (*)

72

ABS system911 (*)60A
10A (*)

69
72

Alfa Romeo CODE system

13

7.5A

72

Climate control system

9

15A

70

Engine cooling radiator fan:First speed
Second speed

6
7

40A

69

40A

69

Passenger compartment fan

4

40A

69

Electronic ignition and injection system

13
14
15
5

7.5A
15A
15A
30A

72
72
72
69

206

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

FUSE

AMPERAGE

FIGURE

Services switched off with starting

1

7.5A

72

Battery power supply for Alfa Romeo CODE/Injection system

12

7.5A

72

All devices operating with the key at MAR are not working

2

30A

69

Almost all the electric systems and components are not working

1
3

80A
70A

69
69

Selespeed gearbox

7
8

30A
20A

69
69

IN AN EMERGENCYSERVICES(*) Specific components and values depending on the version/market. If in doubt, especially for the replacement of fuses which protect safety circuits
and/or systems (Air bag, ABS, etc.), you are recommended to contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services, also to locate the cause of the fuse tripping.

207

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

IN AN EMERGENCY

IN THE EVENT OF A FLAT BATTERYFirst of all, you are advised to refer to the“Car maintenance“ chapter for precautions
to be adopted in order to prevent the battery from getting flat and to ensure its long
durability.

– Disconnect the terminal from the battery negative (–) pole.

CHARGING THE BATTERY– Turn on the charger.

IMPORTANT The description of the battery charging procedure is described only for
informative purposes. This operation should
be carried out by Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

– After charging turn off the charger before disconnecting it from the battery.

Charge the battery as follows:– Connect the charger cables to the battery, respecting polarity.

– Reconnect the terminal to the battery
negative (–) pole.
STARTING WITH
AN AUXILIARY BATTERY

Charging should be slow at a low amp rating for about 24 hours. Charging for a longer
time may damage the battery.

See “Starting with an auxiliary battery“ inthis chapter.
WARNING
The fluid contained in thebattery is poisonous andcorrosive. Avoid contact with theskin or eyes. The battery should becharged in a well ventilated place
and kept away from naked flamesor sources of sparks: danger of explosion and fire.

208

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

WARNING
Never attempt to charge afrozen battery before
thawing it, the danger of explosion
exists. If it has frozen, always
check that the inside elements are
not broken (risk of short circuit)and that the body is not cracked,
with the risk of acid coming out
which is poisonous and corrosive.

The tow ring supplied with the vehicle ishoused in the tool box under the boot mat.
To install the tow ring, proceed as follows:– Take the tow ring from the tool box.

– Remove the cover (A) snap-fitted on
the front (fig. 77) or rear bumper (fig.
78). If the supplied flat screwdriver is used
to carry out this operation, protect the tip
with a soft cloth to prevent damaging thecar.
– Firmly screw the ring in its housing.

A0B0331m

fig. 77

A0B0330m

209

fig. 78

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

WARNING
Carefully clean the threaded housing before tightening the ring. Before beginning to
tow the car make sure that the
tow ring is firmly tightened in its
threaded housing.

IN AN EMERGENCYIF THE VEHICLE IS TO BE TOWEDIN AN EMERGENCYWARNING
Before beginning to tow
the car, turn the ignition
key to MAR and then to STOP, do
not remove it. Removing the key
automatically engages the steering
lock resulting in the impossibility
to steer the wheels. When towing
remember that without the help of
the servo-brake and power steering, it is necessary to exert more
effort on the brake pedal and forsteering. Do not use flexible cables
for towing and avoid jerks. During towing operations make surethat fastening the joint to the cardoes not damage the components
in contact with it. When towing the
car it is compulsory to comply withthe specific traffic regulations concerning both the towing device andbehaviour on the road.

TOWING THE SELESPEEDGEARBOX VERSIONSIMPORTANT For version with Selespeed
gearbox, make sure that it is in neutral (N)(checking that the car moves when pushed)and proceed as for towing a normal car withmechanical gearbox following the instructions
given on the previous page.
If setting to neutral is not possible, do not
tow the vehicle. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

210

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

WARNING
Do not start the engine
when towing the vehicle.

USING AN ARM LIFT OR WORKSHOP LIFT
The vehicle must only be lifted laterally positioning the ends of the arms or the workshop
lift in the areas illustrated, approx. 40 cm from the profile of the wheelhouse(fig. 79).

WARNING
The car is to be lifted positioning the jack or theworkshop lift arm plate only in the
points shown (fig. 79).

IN AN EMERGENCYIF THE VEHICLE IS TO BE LIFTED

A0B0394m

211

fig. 79

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

IN AN EMERGENCY

IF AN ACCIDENTOCCURS– It is important to keep calm.
– If you are not directly involved in the accident, stop at least ten metres away fromthe accident.
– If you are on a motorway do not obstruct the emergency lane with your car.
– Turn off the engine and turn on the hazard lights.
– At night, illuminate the scene of the accident with your headlights.

– Act carefully, you must not risk being run
over.
– Mark the accident by putting the red triangle at the regulatory distance from the car
where it can be clearly seen.
– Call the emergency services making theinformation you give as accurate as you can.
On the motorway use the special columnmounted emergency phones.
– In pile-ups on the motorway, particularly when the visibility is bad, there is a highrisk of other vehicles running into those already immobile. Get out of the vehicle immediately and take refuge behind the guard
rail.

212

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine– If the doors are blocked, do not try to
get out of the vehicle by breaking the stratified windscreen. The rear and side windows
are easier to break.
– Remove the ignition keys of the vehicles involved.
– If you smell petrol or other chemicals,
do not smoke and make sure all cigarettes
are extinguished.
– Use a fire extinguisher, blanket, sand or
earth to put out fires, no matter how small
they are. Never use water.
– If it is not necessary to use the lighting
system, disconnect the terminal from thebattery negative (–) pole.

FIRST-AID KIT– Never leave the injured person alone.
The obligation to provide assistance exists
even for those not directly involved in theaccident.

It is advisable to have also a fire extinguisher and a blanket besides the first-aid
kit.

– Do not congregate around the injured
person.
– Reassure the injured person that help
is on its way and will arrive soon. Stay closeby to calm him/her down in case of panic.

IN AN EMERGENCY

IF ANYONE IS INJURED– Unfasten or cut seat belts holding injured
parties.
– Do not give an injured person anything
to drink.
– Never move an injured person except in
the following cases.
– Pull the injured person from the car only if it risks catching fire, it is sinking in water or is likely to fall over a cliff or similar.
Do not pull his/her arms or legs, do notbend the head and, as far as possible, keep
the body horizontal.

213

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

CAR MAINTENANCECAR MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMMEDMAINTENANCE
Correct maintenance is essential for ensuring long car life under the best conditions.
This is why Alfa Romeo has programmed
a series of checks and maintenance operations every 20,000 km.
IMPORTANT At 2000 km from themaintenance deadline, the Infocenter display will show “SCHEDULED SERVICE WITHIN“ which is shown again turning the ignition key to MAR, every 200 km. For
further details, see “Service“ in “Infocenter
Display“ paragraph in chapter “Getting toknow your car“.

It is however wise to remember that Programmed Maintenance does not completely cover all the car’s requirements: also in
the initial period before 20,000 km service
coupon and later, between one coupon andanother, ordinary care is still necessary suchas for example routinely checking and topping up the level of fluids, checking the tyrepressure, etc...
IMPORTANT The Programmed Maintenance coupons are specified by the Manufacturer. The failure to have them carried out
may invalidate the warranty.
The Programmed Maintenance service iscarried out by all Alfa Romeo Authorized Services, at pre-established times.

214

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

If during each operation, in addition to theones programmed, the need arises for further replacements or repairs, these may be
carried out only with the explicit agreementof the customer.
IMPORTANT You are advised to contact
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services in the eventof any minor operating faults, without waiting for the next service coupon.

Thousands of km

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

180

Check tyre conditions/wear and adjust pressure if necessary

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Check operation of lighting system (headlights, direction indicators, hazard lights,
boot lights, passenger compartment lights, glovebox light, warning lights, etc..)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Check operation of windscreen wiper/washer system, adjust spray jets

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Check position/wear of windscreen/rearscreen wiper blades

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Check front disk brake pad wear indicator

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Check conditions of rear disk brake pads

●

●

●

Sight check for the conditions of: exterior bodywork, underbody protection,
pipes and hoses (exhaust - fuel - brakes),
rubber parts (boots, sleeves, bushes, etc.)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Check for bonnet and boot lock cleanness, lever cleanness and lubrication

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Check condition of timing drive belt●●

Sight check for conditions of Poly-V accessory drive belt●●

Check/adjust handbrake lever stroke

●

●

●

●

Check exhaust emissions

●

●

●

●

●

Check operation of antievaporation system

CAR MAINTENANCESCHEDULED MAINTENANCE PROGRAMME●

215

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

CAR MAINTENANCE

Thousands of km

20

40

60

●

Air cleaner cartridge replacement

80

100

●

120

140

●

160

180

●

Check and if necessary top up fluid levels (brakes, hydraulic clutch, power steering,
windscreen wiper, battery, engine coolant, etc..)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Check and if necessary top up Selespeed oil level

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Replacement of timing drive belt (*) and Poly-V accessory drive belt●

Replacement of spark plugs●

Check operation of engine control systems (through diagnosis)

●

●

●

●

(*) Or every 3 years in harsh conditions (cold climates, stop and go city traffic, dusty areas)
Or every 5 years, regardless of the mileage.

216

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

●

●

●
●

●

Change brake fluid (or every 2 year)
Replacement of dust/pollen filter●●

Check gearbox and differential oil level
Change engine oil and oil filter

●

●

●

●

●

●

●
●

●

●

●
●

●

●

●

An annual inspection plan has been
established for cars thet cover lessthan 20,000 km (e.g. 10,000 km).
It consists of the following:– Check tyre conditions/wear and adjustpressure if required.
– Check lighting system operation (headlights, direction indicators, hazard lights,
boot lights, passenger compartment lights,
glovebox light, warning lights of instrument
panel, etc.)– Check windscreen and rear-screen
wiper/washer operation, adjust nozzles– Visually check the following: engine,
gearbox, transmission, piping (exhaust - fuel - brakes) rubber components (casings sleeves - bushings, etc..), brake and fuelhoses
– Check battery charge condition– Visually check the condition of the belts
and various controls– Check and top up if necessary, the fluid levels (coolant, brake fluid, windscreen
washer fluid, battery, etc.)

ADDITIONALOPERATIONSEvery 1000 km or before long journeys
check and if necessary top up:– engine coolant level– brake fluid/hydraulic clutch control fluid level

CAR MAINTENANCE

ANNUAL INSPECTION
PLAN– power steering fluid level– Change engine oil– windscreen washer and headlamp washer fluid level– Replace engine oil filter– tyre pressure and conditions.

– Change combined pollen filter.

Every 3000 km check the level of theengine oil and top up if necessary.
You are recommended to use products of
the FL Selenia, designed and developed
expressly for Alfa Romeo cars (see “Refilling“ table in “Technical specifications“ chapter).

– Check windscreen/rear-screen blade position/wear– Check condition and wear of the front
brake pad
– Check for bonnet and boot lock cleanness, lever cleanness and lubrication

217

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

CAR MAINTENANCE

IMPORTANTEngine oil

IMPORTANT
Battery

IMPORTANT
Pollen filter

Should prevailing use of the car be under
one of the following specially heavy conditions:

You are recommended to have the battery
charge conditions checked, preferably at theonset of winter, to avoid the possibility offreezing the electrolyte.

If the car is used frequently in dusty or
heavily polluted environments it is advisable
to replace the filtering element more frequently; in particular it should be replaced if
a reduction of the amount of air admitted tothe passenger compartment is noted.

– dusty roads– short distances (less than 7-8 km) repeated and with external temperatures below zero
– frequently idling engines or long distancelow speed driving or in case of a long term
inactivity
replace engine oil more frequently than required on Service Schedule.
IMPORTANTAir cleaner

This check should be carried out more frequently if the car is used prevailingly forshort journeys, or if it is fitted with services
that absorb high amounts of current permanently with the ignition key off, especially
if installed in the after market.
In the case of use of the car in hot climatesor particularly harsh conditions, it is wise
to check the level of the battery fluid (electrolyte) at more frequent intervals than stated in the Scheduled Maintenance Programme.

Using the car on dusty roads, change theair cleaner more frequently than stated in
the Scheduled Maintenance Programme. For
any doubts about the intervals between engine oil and air cleaner changes in relation
to how the car is used, contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services.

218

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Car maintenance should
be entrusted to Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services. For routine and minor maintenance operations you wish tocarry out yourself, always makesure you have the proper equipment, genuine Alfa Romeo spareparts and the necessary fluids; do
not however carry out these operations if you have no experience.

A0B0292m

CAR MAINTENANCECHECKING FLUIDLEVELSWARNING
Never smoke while working
in the engine compartment;
gas and inflammable vapours may
be present, with the risk of fire.

When topping up takecare not to confuse the various types of fluids: they
are all incompatible with one another and could seriously damage
the car.

fig. 1
1 Engine oil - 2 Battery - 3 Brake fluid - 4 Windscreen washer fluid - 5 Engine coolant fluid 6 Power steering fluid

219

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

CAR MAINTENANCE

ENGINE OIL (fig. 2)
The engine oil level should be checked
when the car is standing on a level surface
a few minutes (about 5) after the engine
has been switched off.
Remove the dipstick (A), clean it, put itback completely, remove it once again andcheck that the level is between the MIN
and MAX marks on the dipstick.
The interval between the MIN and MAX
marks corresponds to approximately 1 literof oil.
WARNING
When the engine is hot,take care when working
inside the engine compartment toavoid burns. Remember that whenthe engine is hot, the fan may cut
in: danger of injury.

Never add oil with characteristics (classification,
viscosity) which are different from those of the oil already inthe circuit.

Engine oil consumption

If the oil level is near or even below theMIN, mark, add oil trough the filler neck(B), until reaching the MAX mark.

IMPORTANT Engine oil consumption depends on the way of driving and the conditions of use of the car.

IMPORTANT After adding or changing
the oil, run the engine for a few seconds andwait a few minutes after stopping it.

A0B0164m

fig. 2

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

During the initial period of use the engine
settles, therefore the engine oil consumption can only be considered stabilised after
the first 5000 ÷ 6000 km.

IMPORTANT If a routine check reveals
that the oil level is above the MAX mark,contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services tohave the correct level restored.

WARNING
Scarves, ties and other loose clothing might be pulled
by moving parts.

220

Max. engine oil consumption is usually
400 grams every 1000 km.

Used engine oil and filter
contain pollutants. Contact
Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services to have the oil and filter
changed as these are equipped todispose of the waste oil and filters
respecting the environment andlaws.

– if the level is below the MAX mark,
top up with oil until reaching the correct level;

The oil level of the Selespeed systemshould be carried out with the car on a level surface and with the engine stopped andcold.

– after screwing the cap back on, insert
the breather tube completely on the cap
spout and turn the ignition key to STOP.

Used gearbox oil containpollutants. Contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services
to have the oil changed as these are
equipped to dispose of the waste
oil respecting the environment andlaws.

To check the level, proceed as follows:

CAR MAINTENANCESELESPEED GEARBOXHYDRAULIC SYSTEM OIL(fig. 3)– turn the ignition key to MAR;– disconnect the breather tube and remove the cap (A) checking that the level
corresponds with the MAX mark on the dipstick of the actual cap;

Do not add oil with different characteristics thanthose of the oil already inthe system.

WARNING
When the engine is hot,take care when working
inside the engine compartment toavoid burns. Remember that whenthe engine is hot, the fan may cut
in: danger of injury.

A0B0162m

221

fig. 3

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

CAR MAINTENANCE

The antifreeze mixture contained in thecooling circuit guarantees protection down
to –35°C.

ENGINE COOLANT
LEVEL (fig. 4)
WARNING
Do not remove he cap
when the engine is hot:danger of burns.
The level of the coolant in the header tank(reservoir) should be checked with the engine cold and the car on a level surface andit should be between the MIN and MAX
marks on the tank. If the level is low, loosen
the header tank cap (A) and slowly poura mixture of the fluid specified in the ”Fluids and lubricants ” table in section “Technical Specifications”, through the filler neck
until nearing the MAX mark; have this operation carried out at Alfa Romeo Authorised
Services.
A0B0161m

The cooling system ispressurised. If necessary,
replace the cap only withanother original one, otherwise theefficiency of the system could becompromised.

Check that the oil level in the reservoir isat the MAX level.
This operation must be carried out with the
car on level ground and when the engine
is stationary and cold.
Check that the level reaches the MAX reference notch on the reservoir or coincides
with the upper notch (maximum level) on
the dipstick integral with the reservoir cap.
If the level of the oil in the reservoir falls
below the specified level, top up only with
one of the products listed in the table “Fluids and lubricants“ in “Technical specifications“ chapter as follows:

Top up only with the same
fluid contained in the cooling circuit. PARAFLU UP(red) cannot be mixed with
PARAFLU 11 (blue) or with otherfluids. Should this take place, do
not start the engine and contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Service.

222 fig. 4

A0B0158m

fig. 5

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

POWER STEERING OIL LEVEL(fig. 5)

BRAKE AND HYDRAULIC
CLUTCH FLUID (fig. 6)– When the engine is running turn thesteering wheel lock to lock a few minutes.

From time to time check the instrument
panel warning light x by pressing cover(B) of the reservoir (A) (with the ignition
key at MAR) instrument panel warning
light should come on.

– Top up to the MAX level notch andthen replace the cover.

WARNING
Power steering fluid is highly inflammable. Do not
let it come into contact with hot engine parts.

When loosening the reservoir cap do not allow thefluid to come into contact
with painted parts. If it does, wash
it off immediately with water.

IMPORTANT Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services for maintenance and repair operations.
A0B0157m

Oil consumption is very
low, if topping up again isneeded shortly afterwards,
have the system checked for possible leaks by Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

WARNING
Symbol π on the container
indicates synthetic typebrake fluid distinguishing it fromthe mineral kind. Using mineral
type fluids damages the sp ecial
rubber braking system gaskets
beyond s

223

fig. 6

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

WARNING
Brake and clutch fluid ispoisonous and highly corrosive. In the event of accidental
contact, wash the parts involved
immediately with neutral soap andwater, then rinse thoroughly. Seea doctor at once if the fluid is swallowed.

CAR MAINTENANCE– Start the engine and allow the oil in thereservoir to settle.

CAR MAINTENANCE

IMPORTANT Brake and hydraulic clutch
fluid is hygroscopic (i.e. it absorbs moisture).
For this reason, if the car is mainly used inareas with a high degree of atmospheric humidity, the fluid should be replaced at more
frequent intervals than specified in the
Scheduled Maintenance Programme.

WINDSCREEN/HEADLIGHTWASHER FLUID (fig. 7)
Check the level in the reservoir removing
the cap (A).
If necessary top up using a mixture of water and TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC
35 as follows:– 30% of TUTELA PROFESSIONAL
SC 35 and 70% water in summer;– 50% of TUTELA PROFESSIONAL
SC 35 and 50% water in winter;– in the case of temperatures below -20°C
use TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC 35
fluid neat.

A0A0156m

224

fig. 7

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

WARNING
Do not travel with thewindscreen washer reservoir empty: the action of the windscreen washer is fundamental for
improving vision.

WARNING
Some commercial additives
for windscreen washers
are inflammable. The engine compartment contains hot components
which could set it on fire.

To avoid damaging thepump motors, do not use
the windscreen washers
when the reservoir is empty.

The air cleaner is connected to the temperature and air flow sensors which send theelectrical signals needed for correct operation of the injection and ignition system tothe control unit.
It must therefore always be in perfect conditions to ensure correct operation of the engine, low consumption and exhaust emission levels.

The description for changing the cleaner is describedfor informative purposes
only. This operation should be carried out by Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services.
If they are not carried out correctly and with the due precautions, the operations involving
cleaner replacement describedherein may compromise the safetyof the car.

A0B0154m

fig. 8– remove the cover (A-fig. 8);– slacken the two screws shown by thearrows and move the bracket (B-fig. 9)
to one side complete with relay;– remove the sleeve as follows:– slacken the clamps (A-fig. 10), disconnect the air flow meter electrical connection (C) and remove the sleeve (B).

A0B0431m

fig. 9

A0B0151m

fig. 10

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

To change the cleaner, proceed as follows:

CAR MAINTENANCE

AIR FILTER225

CAR MAINTENANCE

When the car is habitually driven in dusty areas,
the cleaner should bechanged at shorter intervals thanthose given in the Programmed
Maintenance Schedule.

POLLEN FILTERBATTERY

This has mechanical/electrostatic air filtering actions, provided that the windows
and doors are shut.

The battery is of the “Limited Maintenance“ type and is fitted with an optical indicator (A-fig. 11) for checking the electrolyte level and charge.

Have the pollen filter checked once a year
by Alfa Romeo Authorized Services, preferably at the onset of summer.

Any attempt to clean the
air cleaner may cause serious engine damage.

If the car is mainly used in dusty or heavily polluted areas, the filter should bechanged at more frequent intervals thanspecified in the Scheduled Maintenance Programme.
IMPORTANT The failure to replace thefilter can considerably reduce the effectiveness of the climate control system.

Under normal conditions of use the electrolyte does not need topping up with distilledwater. To make sure that it is in efficient conditions, at routine intervals check the indicator on the battery cover which should be dark
in colour with a green central area.
If the indicator is a bright light colour, or
dark without the green central area, contact
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

A0B0147m

226

fig. 11

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

WARNING
The liquid in the battery ispoisonous and corrosive.
Avoid contact with eyes and skin.
Do not bring naked flames or possible sources of sparks near to thebattery: risk of fire and explosion.

Incorrect fitting of electrical accessories can seriously damage the car. If after
buying the car, you wish to installelectric accessories (alarm, soundsystem, radiotelephone, etc.) contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services who will be able to suggest
the most suitable devices andabove all advise about the need touse a more powerful battery.

WARNING
When doing any work on
the battery or near it,
always wear special protective
goggles.

CAR MAINTENANCE

Batteries contain substances that are very
harmful for the environment. You are advised to have thebattery changed at Alfa Romeo Authorized Services, which are properly equipped for disposing of usedbatteries respecting nature and thelaw.

WARNING
Working with a low fluid
level may damage the battery irreversibly, even causing it toburst.
If the car is to remain stationary for a long time invery cold weather, remove
the battery and take it to a warm
place, otherwise it might freeze.

227

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

CAR MAINTENANCECHECKING THE CHARGECHARGING THE BATTERY

The battery charge may be checked satisfactorily using the indicator, and acting according to the colour the indicator shows.

IMPORTANT The description of the battery charging procedure is described only for
informative purposes. This operation should
be carried out by Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

Refer to the table below or to the label(fig. 12) on the battery.

Charging should be slow at a low amp rating for about 24 hours. Charging for a longer
time may damage the battery.
Charge the battery as follows:– Disconnect the terminal from the battery negative (–) pole.
IMPORTANT When reconnecting thenegative battery cable after having disconnected it, wait for 2 minutes before turning the key to enable the climate control system to reset actuator strokes properly.

– Connect the charger cables to the battery terminals ensuring that the bias is correct.
– Turn on the charger.
– After charging turn off the charger before disconnecting it from the battery.
– Reconnect the battery negative terminal (–).
IMPORTANT Turn off the alarm with theremote control and deactivate the system
turning the emergency key to “OFF“ (see“Electronic alarm“ in the chapter “Getting
to know your car“).

A0B0146m

Brightwhite colour

Top up electrolyte

Contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services

Dark colour
without green central area

Low battery charge

Charge the battery(advisable to contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services)

Dark colourwith green central area

Electrolyte level
and charge sufficient

No action needed

228 fig. 12

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

REPLACING THE BATTERY
If required, replace the battery with a genuine spare part having the same specifications. If a battery with different specifications is fitted, the service intervals given in
the Scheduled Maintenance Programme inthis section will no longer be valid. Referto the instructions provided by the battery
manufacturer.
USEFUL HINTS TO EXTEND
THE LIE OF YOUR BATTERYIMPORTANT A battery kept at below
50% of its capacity is damaged by sulphation, the capacity is reduced and starting isdifficult, there is also more possibility offreezing (this can occur at –10 °C). In theevent of a prolonged stop, refer to “Vehicle inactivity“ in the chapter “Correct use of
the car“.

To avoid quickly draining the battery andto preserve its operating conditions over thecourse of time, carefully follow the instructions below:– The terminals must always be tightened.
– As far as possible, avoid keeping services on for a long time with the engine
stopped (radio, hazard lights, parking lights,etc.).

– When leaving the car parked in agarage, make sure that the doors, bonnet,
boot and interior lids are properly shut toprevent internal lights from staying on.
– Before doing any work on the electric
system, disconnect the battery negative terminal.
– If after purchasing the car, you wish to
install electrical accessories which need apermanent electrical supply (alarm, handsfree phone, radio-navigator etc.) contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services whose qualified personnel, in addition to suggesting themost suitable devices from Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo will be able to evaluate the total
electrical absorption, checking whether the
car’s electric system is able to support theload required or whether a battery with higher capacity is necessary. In fact, these devices continue to absorb current with theignition key off (car parked, engine off) andmay gradually drain the battery.

CAR MAINTENANCEWARNING
Never attempt to charge afrozen battery before
thawing it, the danger of explosion
exists. If it has frozen, always
check that the inside elements are
not broken and that the body is notcracked, with the risk of acid coming out which is poisonous andcorrosive.

229

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

CAR MAINTENANCE

The total absorption of these accessories(standard and installed later) must be lessthan 0.6 mA x Ah (of the battery), as shownin the table below:
Battery

Maximum permissible
loadless absorption

60 Ah

36 mA

70 Ah

42 mA

ELECTRONICCONTROL UNITSWith normal use of the car, no particularprecautions need to be taken.
In the event of work on the electric systemor emergency starting, the instructions given below must absolutely be adhered to:– If electrical welding is to be carried out
on the body of the car, the electronic control units must be disconnected or removed
if the work involves the production of hightemperatures.

– Always switch off the engine before disconnecting the battery from the electric system.

You are also reminded that services withhigh current absorption activated by the user,
such as bottle warmers, vacuum cleaners,
cellular telephone, mini refrigerator, etc. accelerate the battery drainage process if they
are powered with the engine not running or running at idle speed.

– If it is necessary to charge the battery,always disconnect it from the electric system.

IMPORTANT It should also be notedthat improper branches on connectors of theelectric wiring for installing additional equipment is dangerous, particularly if safety devices are involved.

– Check that the bias is correct and thatthe connections between the battery andthe electric system are in efficient conditions.

– When starting in an emergency, only
use an auxiliary battery and not a battery
charger.

– Do not connect or disconnect the terminals of the electronic units while the ignition key is at MAR.

230

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine– Do not check for current in the cables by
short-circuiting the ends.

WARNING
Alterations or repairs to
the electric system carriedout incorrectly and without taking
into account the specifications of
the system, may cause operating
faults with the risk of fire.

Incorrect pressure causes abnormal tyrewear fig. 13:

Check the pressure of each tyre, every two
weeks and before a long journey.

A - Normal pressure: tread evenly worn.

The pressure should be checked with thetyre rested and cold.
It is normal for the pressure to increase
when the car is in use. If you have to checkor restore the pressure when the tyres are
hot, bear in mind that the pressure should
be +0.3 bar compare with the specified rating.
For the correct tyre inflation pressure, see“Wheels“ in “Technical specifications“ chapter.

B - Low pressure: tread particularly wornat the edges.
C - High pressure: tread particularly wornin the centre.

WARNING
Excessively low pressurecauses overheating of thetyre with the possibility of serious
damage to it.

WARNINGS
Where possible, avoid sudden braking, tyresquealing starts, etc.
Particularly avoid violent bumps against
kerbs, potholes or obstacles of various kinds.
Prolonged driving on rough roads may damage the tyres.
Routinely check the tyres for cuts on thesides, swellings or uneven tread wear. If necessary contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

CAR MAINTENANCE

WHEELS AND TYRES

Avoid overloading the vehicle when travelling: this may cause serious damage to thewheels and tyres.

Tyres should be changed when the tread
thickness is reduced to 1.6 mm. In any casefollow local regulations.
A0B0235m

WARNING
Remember that car roadholding also depends oncorrect tyre inflation pressure.

231

fig. 13

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

CAR MAINTENANCE

If a tyre is punctured, stop immediately
and change it to avoid damage to the tyre,
the rim, suspensions and steering system.
Tyres age even if they are not used much.
Cracks in the tread rubber are a sign of aging. In any case, if the tyres have been on
the car for over 6 years, they should bechecked by specialised personnel, to see ifthey can still be used.
In the case of replacement, always fit newtyres, avoiding those of dubious origin.
Alfa 156 GTA uses Tubeless tyres.
Never use an inner tube with these tyres.
If a tyre is changed, also change the inflation valve
To allow even wear between the front andrear tyres, it is advisable to change themover every 10-15 thousand kilometres,
keeping them on the same side of the carso as to not reverse the direction of rotation.

WARNING
Do not cross switch the tyres, moving them from theright of the car to the left and vice versa.

WARNING
Alloy rim painting involving
temperatures exceeding
150°C should be avoided sincewheel mechanical characteristics
could be impaired.

A0B0236m

232

fig. 14

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

RUBBER HOSES
As far as the brake system and fuel supply rubber hoses are concerned, carefully follow the Scheduled Maintenance Programmeof this chapter. Indeed ozone, high temperatures and prolonged lack of fluid in thesystem may cause hardening and crackingof the hoses, with possible leaks. Careful
control is therefore necessary.

BLADES– Raise the windscreen wiper arm (A)and position the blade so that it forms anangle of 90° with the arm.

Changing the windscreen
wiper blade (fig. 15)– When the spring is released from thecurved top of the arm, move the blade toallow the arm to be withdrawn through theslot.

Periodically clean the rubber part using special products TUTELA PROFESSIONAL
SC 35 is recommended.
If the rubber blades are bent or worn theyshould be replaced. In any case they should
be changed once a year.
A few simple notions can reduce the possibility of damage to the blades:– If the temperature falls below zero,
make sure that ice has not frozen the rubber against the glass. If necessary, thaw using an antifreeze product.

IMPORTANT The blade on driver’s side
is fitted with a spoiler that improves adhesion between the blade and the windscreen.
To prevent improper fitting, before changing the blade, check the spoiler direction of
the blade to be replaced, then fit the new
blade following the same spoiler direction.

– Press tab (B) of the coupling spring andremove the blade to be replaced from thearm (A).

– Insert a new blade passing it throughthe curved top of the arm (A) through theslot.
– Lift the blade to clamp tab (B) of thecoupling spring with the curved top of thearm.
– Lower the windscreen wiper arm.

– Remove any snow from the glass: in addition to protecting the blades, this prevents
effort on the motor and overheating.

A0B0432m– Do not operate the windscreen and rearwindow wipers on dry glass.

IMPORTANT The blades may differ according to the versions. In any case, follow
the instructions provided in the packs available as spares from Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services.

233

fig. 15

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Proceed as follows:

WARNING
Driving with worn wiper
blades is a serious hazard,
because visibility is reduced in bad
weather.

CAR MAINTENANCE

WINDSCREENWIPERCAR MAINTENANCESPRAY JETSHEADLIGHT WASHERS

Make sure that the windscreen and headlight (where applicable) washer jets deliver a jet of fluid which is adequate and correctly directed.

Regularly check that the spray jets are intact and clean (fig. 16).

If the spray devices are not working checkthat the supply circuit is not blocked. If necessary unblock the nozzles using a needle.

If it is necessary to direct the jet, contact
an Alfa Romeo Authorized Service.

BODYWORKPROTECTION FROMATMOSPHERIC AGENTS
The main causes of corrosion are:– atmospheric pollution– salty air and humidity (coastal areas, or
hot humid climates)– seasonal environment conditions.
Not to be underestimated is also the abrasive action of wind-borne atmospheric dust
and sand and mud and gravel raised by other vehicles.
On your Alfa 156 GTA Alfa Romeo
has implemented the best manufacturing
technologies to effectively protect the bodywork against corrosion.

A0B0379m

234

fig. 16

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

– Painting products and systems whichgive the car particular resistance to corrosion
and abrasion.
– Use of galvanised (or pretreated) steel
sheets, with high resistance to corrosion.
– Spraying the underbody, engine compartment, wheel arches and other parts withhighly protective wax products.
– Spraying of plastic parts, with a protective function, in the more exposed points:
underdoor, inner wheel arch linings, edges,etc.
– Use of “open“ boxed sections to prevent condensation and pockets of moisturefrom triggering rust inside.
VEHICLE EXTERIOR AND
UNDERBODY WARRANTYThe Alfa 156 GTA is guaranteedagainst perforation due to rust of any original element of the structure or body. For thegeneral terms of this warranty, refer to the
Warranty Booklet.

RECOMMENDATIONSTO PRESERVE THE BODYWORKPaint
The paintwork does not only serve an aesthetic purpose but also protects the underlying sheet metal.
In the case of deep scrapes or scores, youare advised to have the necessary touching up carried out immediately to avoid theformation of rust.
Only original products should be used fortouching up paint (see “Bodywork paintidentification label“ in the “Technical specifications“ chapter).
Normal paint maintenance consists inwashing at intervals depending on the conditions and environment of use. For example, in highly polluted areas, or if the roads
are sprayed with salt, it is wise to wash the
car more frequently.

To correctly wash the car:1) Remove the aerial from the roof to prevent damage to it if the car is washed in
an automatic system.
2) Spray the body with a low pressure
jet of water.
3) Pass a sponge moistened with a lightdetergent solution, rinsing the sponge frequently.

CAR MAINTENANCE

These include:4) Rinse well with water and dry with ajet of air or a chamois leather.
When drying, take particular care with theless visible parts like door surrounds, bonnet and around the headlights where water may stagnate. The car should not be taken to a closed area immediately, but left in
the open so that residual water can evaporate.

Detersives pollute water.
The car should therefore be
washed in areas equipped
for the collection and purificationof the liquid used in the washingprocess.

235

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

CAR MAINTENANCE

Do not wash the car after it has been left
in the sun or with the bonnet hot: this mayalter the shine of the paintwork.
Exterior plastic parts must be cleaned in
the same way as the rest of the vehicle.
Where possible, do not park under trees;
the resinous substance many species release
give the paint a dull appearance and increase the possibility of triggering rustprocesses.

Windows

Engine compartment

Use specific products to clean the windows.
Use clean cloths to avoid scratching or altering the transparency of the glass.

At the end of the winter the engine compartment should be carefully washed, without directing the jet against electronic control units. Contact a specialised workshop tohave this done.

IMPORTANT The inside of therearscreen should be wiped gently with acloth in the direction of the filaments toavoid damaging the heating device.

Detergents cause waterpollution. Therefore the engine compartment should
be washed in areas equipped forcollecting and purifying the liquid
used in the washing process.

IMPORTANT Bird droppings must be
washed off immediately and thoroughly as
the acid they contain is particularly aggressive.

IMPORTANT The vehicle should washedwith the engine cold and the ignition key at
STOP. After washing make sure that thevarious protections (e.g. rubber caps andvarious covers) have not been damaged or
removed.

236

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Periodically check that water is not trapped
under the mats (due to water dripping off
shoes, umbrellas, etc.) which could cause oxidisation of the sheet metal.

WARNING
Never use inflammableproducts like fuel oil ether
or rectified petrol for cleaning inside the car. The electrostatic discharges generated when rubbing
to clean may cause fire.

CLEANING LEATHER SEATSINTERIOR PLASTIC PARTS– Remove dried on dirt with a lightly
moistened chamois leather or cloth without pressing too hard.

Use appropriate products designed to preserve the appearance of components.

– Remove liquid or grease stains with a
dry absorbent cloth without rubbing. Then
wipe with a soft cloth or chamois leather
with water and neutral soap. If the stain persists, use specific products, carefully following the instructions for use
IMPORTANT Never use spirit or alcoholbased products.

IMPORTANT Never use spirit or petroleum to clean the glass of the instrument
panel.

CAR MAINTENANCE

INTERIOR FITTINGSWARNING
Do not keep aerosol cans in
the car. There is the risk
they might explode. Aerosol cansmust never be exposed to a temperature above 50°C. The temperature inside the car might go wellbeyond that figure when exposedto the sun’s rays.

237

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

ALFA 156 GTA SPORTWAGON

A L FA 1 5 6 G TA S P O R T WA G O N
In this chapter you will find all the specific information for Alfa 156 GTA
Sportwagon that integrate and complete the previous chapters.

DOORS

Opening/closing from inside

REAR DOORS
Opening/closing from outside– To open the door, only with the insideknob lifted (A-fig. 1), pull the opening
handle (B-fig. 2).
– To close, press the knob (A-fig. 1)
also with the door open, then shut the door.

WARNING
Rear doors can only be
opened if the “child safety“ device is off.

– To open the door pull the handle(A-fig. 3).
– To close, press the knob (B-fig. 3), also with the door open, then shut the door.

A0B0077m

238 fig. 1

A0B0078m

fig. 2

fig. 3

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0B0079m

Position 1 (control up) = Device engaged.

SEATS

The rear doors are fitted with a locking device (A) which prevents them from being
opened from inside.

Position 2 (control down) = Device released.

REAR SEATWARNING Each device only acts on thedoor on which it is installed.
The device can only be engaged with thedoors open raising or lowering the control
with the ignition key.

WARNING Also follow the instructions
given in the chapter “Getting to know yourcar“ under the paragraph “Child safety
lock“.

Headrest
The car is fitted with two headrests for theside seats (fig. 5). On request for versions/markets where applicable, the car
may also be fitted with a third headrest forthe central seat (fig. 6).
To pull out the third headrest, push it upwards until hearing the stopping click.

A0B0080m

A0B0094m

fig. 4

fig. 5

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

ALFA 156 GTA SPORTWAGONCHILD SAFETY LOCK (fig. 4)239

ALFA 156 GTA SPORTWAGON

The third headrest (centre) is not removable, whereas the side headrests may beremoved as follows:– Raise the headrests about 2 cm.
– Press the buttons (A and B-fig. 5) atthe same time and remove the headrests.
– To refit the headrests keep the buttons
pressed (A and B-fig. 5) and insert themcompletely.

WARNING
Remember that the third
headrest (central) shouldbe pulled out completely so thatthe nape and not the neck rests on
it. Only in this position does it
exert its protective action if the car
is hit from behind.

Centre armrest
To use the centre armrest, lower it as illustrated (fig. 7), using the handle (A).

A0B0095m

A0B0096m

240 fig. 6

fig. 7

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

This compartment can be used for carrying long loads.
To gain access to the compartment lower
the armrest, pull the handle (A-fig. 8) andlower the lid on the armrest (fig. 9).
On versions fitted with the third headrest,
before lowering the lid on the armrest, lift
the headrest completely and set the fabricprotection.

On request for versions/markets whereapplicable, the compartment can be fittedwith a bag for carrying skis.

REARSCREEN WIPER –REARSCREEN WASHERWARNING Lay the bag in the passenger compartment before putting the skis in.
After carrying skis, let the bag dry (if wet),then fold it correctly and insert it in the compartment.

OPERATION (fig. 10)
This is only possible with the ignition key
at MAR.
To operate the rearscreen wiper turn theknob (A) to position (. The rearscreen
wiper works intermittently.
Pushing the lever (B) forwards therearscreen washer jet comes into operation
which is disengaged when the lever is released.

ALFA 156 GTA SPORTWAGON

Ski compartment

With the rearscreen washer, the wiper
comes into operation automatically for a few
seconds.

A0B0097m

fig. 8

A0B0098m

fig. 9fig. 10

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0B0081m

241

ALFA 156 GTA SPORTWAGON

CHANGING THE BLADE(fig. 11)SPRAY JET (fig. 12)

The rearscreen wiper blade should be replaced together with the arm.
To replace:– mark the position of the blade in relation to the rearscreen.

If the jet does not spray, check that thereis fluid in the windscreen washer reservoir:
see the corresponding paragraph in the chapter “Vehicle maintenance“. Then check thatthe holes on the jet (A) are not clogged andfree them using a pin, if necessary.

LUGGAGECOMPARTMENT
The luggage compartment can be opened
by remote control from outside pressing the
button (C-fig. 14), also when the electronic alarm is on.
WARNING If the tailgate is not shutproperly, this will be shown by the corresponding warning light ´ and warning message on the Infocenter display.

– Raise the lid (A), slacken the nut (B)and remove the arm (C).
– Correctly position the new arm and firmly tighten the fastening nut.
– Lower the lid.

OPENING FROM INSIDE(fig. 13)
To open the tailgate from inside the passenger compartment pull the lever (A) atthe side of the driver’s seat.

A0B0082m

242 fig. 11

A0B0083m

fig. 12

fig. 13

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0B0042m

Lifting the tailgate is facilitated by the action of the gas springs.

The gas springs are calibrated to ensure correct
lifting of the tailgate withthe weights foreseen by the manufacturer. The addition of objects(spoiler, etc.) may adversely affectcorrect operation and safety in useof the tailgate.

OPENING WITH REMOTE
CONTROL (fig. 14)

CLOSING THE TAILGATE(fig. 15)

The boot can be opened by remote control
pressing the button (C-fig. 14) on the key,also when the electronic alarm is engaged.

To lower the tailgate use the grip (A) on
the interior trim.

In this case the alarm system switches offvolumetric protection and the tailgate control sensor. The system also sounds two
beeps and the direction indicators light up
for three seconds (with the exception of versions for certain markets.
Closing the boot again the control functions
are restored, the system sounds two beeps
and the direction indicators light up for threeseconds (with the exception of versions forcertain markets.

A0B0743m

fig. 14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0B0084m

fig. 15

AlfaWiki.nl

ALFA 156 GTA SPORTWAGONWARNING
Only use the tailgate opening lever with the car stationary.

243

ALFA 156 GTA SPORTWAGON

RESTRAINING THE LOAD
(fig. 16-17)

REVERSIBLE MAT(fig. 18-19)

The loads carried can be held in place withthe belts hooked to the rings provided at thecorners of the boot.

The central part (A-fig. 18) of the floor
trim is reversible: it can be taken off, turned
over and inserted with side (B) upwards.

The rings also serve for fastening the luggage retainer net (available on request forversions/markets where applicable c/o Alfa Romeo Authorized Services).

To put the mat back, insert the front edge
(A-fig. 19) in the housing on the floor.

A0B0087m

fig. 18
A0B0085m

244 fig. 16

A0B0086m

fig. 17

fig. 19

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0B0088m

On versions not fitted with the automatic
rear geometry control system, when travelling at night with a load in the boot, it isnecessary to adjust the height of the low
beams (see “Headlamps“ paragraph in thechapter “Getting to know your car“). For
correct use of the aiming device, also makesure that the load does not exceed the values given in the same paragraph.

WARNING
When using the boot, neverexceed the maximum permissible loads given in the “Technical specifications“ chapter. Also
make sure that the items containedin the boot are firmly secured, toprevent them being thrownforward and harming the passengers in the event of abrupt braking.

WARNING
If you want to carry fuel ina reserve can, you should
comply with legal regulations, only
using a certified can suitably fastened to the load retainer rings at
the corner of the boot. However,remember that this increases therisk of fire in the event of an accident.

ALFA 156 GTA SPORTWAGONCAUTIONS FORCARRYING LUGGAGEWARNING
Heavy luggage without restraints could cause serious
harm to the passengers in an accident.

245

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

ALFA 156 GTA SPORTWAGONODDMENTS COMPARTMENT(fig. 20-21)
On the sides of the boot there are two recesses closed by a lid.
To open the cover, press button (A) andturn it downwards. As optional for versions/markets where applicable, the oddment compartment on the left-hand side canbe provided with CD-Changer.

CURRENT SOCKET (optional forversions/markets whereapplicable) (fig. 22)
This is on the left-hand side of the boot.
To use the socket, open the lid (A). The
socket is supplied with the ignition switch at
MAR and can only be used with accessories
that absorb a maximum of 15A (power
180W).

OBJECTS RETAINER NET
The net can be hooked in different positions (fig. 26-27-28-29) using housings (A and B-fig. 23) provided in thefront part of the boot and housings (C and
D-fig. 24) in the rear part.

A0B0091m

A0B0101m

Do not connect accessories
with higher absorption to
the socket. Prolonged current absorption might drain the battery preventing the engine from being started.

fig. 20

fig. 23
A0B0092m

246 fig. 21

A0B0093m

fig. 22

fig. 24

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0B0102m

To release the net, pull it upwards keeping
the connection point pressed (C-fig. 25).

LUGGAGE COVER
The luggage cover (A-fig. 30) can berolled up and removed.
To roll, remove the two rear pins (Bfig. 31) from their housings.

A0B0103m

fig. 25

A0B0105m

fig. 27
A0B0106m

fig. 28

A0B0108m

fig. 30

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0B0107m

fig. 29

A0B0104m

fig. 26WARNING Accompany the cover whenrolling, holding it by the handle (C-fig. 30).

ALFA 156 GTA SPORTWAGON

To fasten the net, insert the hooks (Afig. 25) in the housings (B-fig. 25) andpush downwards.

247

ALFA 156 GTA SPORTWAGON

To remove the cover roll it and check thatthe passenger compartment separation net
is also rolled (see following paragraph), thenpull the hooks back (A-fig. 32). Raise andremove the cover from the boot.
To put the cover back on, insert the endsof the reel in the respective housings, making sure that the catches are correctly locked
forwards making the green symbols at thebase of the actual button visible, then pullit by the handle (C-fig. 30) and hook thetwo rear pins (B-fig. 31).

To avoid damage to thecover do not rest any objects on it.

The upper separation net between the passenger compartment and the boot is contained in the luggage cover reel (A).
WARNINGIn the event of an accident
or abrupt braking any
objects on top of the cover might
be thrown into the passenger compartment, with the risk of harming
the occupants; use of the passenger compartment separation net isrecommended.

A0B0109m

248 fig. 31

To lay the net, remove it from the reel andhook the ends in the two housings (B).
To rewind the net, release the ends fromthe housings (B) and accompany it as it
winds.

A0B0110m

fig. 32

A0B0111m

fig. 33

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

UPPER PASSENGERCOMPARTMENT SEPARATION
NET (fig. 33-34)

The lower passenger compartment andboot separation net (A) is contained in thereel fastened under the housing of the luggage cover.

EXTENDING THE BOOT

1/3 Partial extension (fig. 37)

The split rear seat makes partial (1/3 or
2/3) or total extension of the boot possible.

Extension of the left-hand side of the bootmakes it possible to carry two passengers
on the right-hand part of the rear seat.

To use the maximum loading volume, remove the luggage cover following the instructions given in the corresponding paragraph.

To lay the net remove it from the reel andfasten the hooks (B) to the rings (C).

A0B0113m

To rewind the net, release the hooks (B)from the rings (C) and accompany it while
it winds.

ALFA 156 GTA SPORTWAGON

LOWER PASSENGERCOMPARTMENT SEPARATION
NET (fig. 35-36)(optional for versions/markets where applicable)

fig. 35
A0B0112m

fig. 34

A0B0114m

fig. 36

fig. 37

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0B0115m

249

ALFA 156 GTA SPORTWAGON

2/3 Partial extension (fig. 38)

Total extension (fig. 39)

Extension of the right-hand side of the bootmakes it possible to carry one passenger on
the left-hand part of the rear seat.

Completely folding the rear seat makes the
maximum load volume available.
To extend the boot– Check that the lateral safety belt buckles(A-fig. 40) are located in their pockets on
the seat back and that the tab (B-fig. 40)of the central abdominal safety belts is hooked
onto the support (C-fig. 40).

A0B0116m– Tilt the cushions forward pulling fromthe handle (A-fig. 41) at the centre ofeach cushion.
– remove the side headrests from the rearseat and insert them in the special housingson the cushions (fig. 42).
– If the car is fitted with the third headrest from the centre of the seat, lower it
completely.

– Remove the roll with the luggage cover.

fig. 38
A0B0117m

250 fig. 39

A0B0118m

fig. 40

fig. 41

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0B0119m

– Fold the seat backs forward to obtaina single loading surface with the boot floor.

To take the seats backto the normal position– Move the seat backs to the vertical position making sure that they are caught correctly.

WARNING The seat backs are correctly caught when the button (A-fig. 45)
next to each handle (B-fig. 45) is back in
the handle.
– Remove the headrest and tilt the cushion backward, making sure that the safety
belts do not remain twisted in the hidden
section between the cushion and seat back.
– Refit the headrest on the seat back.

A0B0121m– Refit the roll with the luggage cover.

ALFA 156 GTA SPORTWAGON– Release the seat back catch raising thehandle (A-fig. 43) for the right seat backand handle (B-fig. 44) for the left seatback.

fig. 43
A0B0120m

fig. 42

A0B0122m

fig. 44

fig. 45

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0B0123m

251

ALFA 156 GTA SPORTWAGON

INTERNAL FITTINGSREFUELLING

GRAB HANDLES (fig. 46)

EMERGENCY FUEL
FLAP OPENING (fig. 47)

There are two grab handles in correspondence with the front doors.
Two grab handles (A) are located above
the rear doors fitted with a coat hook (B).

If the fuel flap opening lever fails to work,pull the emergency cord (A) on the righthand side of the boot.

A0B0124m

252 fig. 46

A0B0125m

fig. 47

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

SOUND SYSTEM
The fixed sound system, with CD player
with parametric sound equalizer has been
designed to suit the specific characteristics of the passenger compartment, witha personalised design that matches thestyle of the dashboard. The sound system
instructions for use are described in the attached supplement.

– Remove the bulb holder unit (Dfig. 49) pressing on the retainer tabs (Efig. 49).

– Reinsert the bulb holder unit fitting it
correctly between the retainer tabs (Efig. 49).

WARNING Before changing a bulb, read
the warnings and precautions given in thechapter “In an emergency“.

– Remove and replace the bulb concerned(spherical with bayonet coupling) pressing
lightly and turning counterclockwise(fig. 50):

– Refit the lid (A or B-fig. 48) inserting
it from outside until it fits in.

(F) reversing light bulb

REVERSING LIGHTSAND REAR FOG GUARDS(G) rear fog guard bulb.

To change the bulbs (Type B, 21W):– Open the tailgate.

ALFA 156 GTA SPORTWAGON

IF AN EXTERIOR
LIGHT GOES OUT– Remove the cover (A or B-fig. 48)
in correspondence with the light concerned,
withdrawing it at the side.

A0B0128m

fig. 48

A0B0129m

fig. 49

fig. 50

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0B0130m

253

ALFA 156 GTA SPORTWAGON

DIRECTION INDICATORSAND SIDE/STOP LIGHTS
To replace the bulbs (Type B, 21W direction indicators, 5/21W side/stop lights):– Open the tailgate.
– Slacken the two fastening nuts (Afig. 51) and remove the protective cover (B-fig. 51).

– Remove the bulb holder unit (Afig. 52) pressing on the retainer tab (Bfig. 52).
– Remove and replace the bulb concerned(spherical with bayonet coupling) pressing
lightly and turning counterclockwise(fig. 53):(D) direction indicator.

A0B0132m

fig. 52

A0B0133m

fig. 53

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine– Refit the protective cover (B-fig. 51)
fastening with nuts (A-fig. 51).

(C) side light/stop light

A0B0131m

254 fig. 51– Reinsert the bulb holder unit fitting theretainer tabs correctly (B-fig. 52).

– Remove the bulb holder (C-fig. 55)
turning clockwise and replace the bulb
(D-fig. 55) which snaps on.

To replace the bulbs (Type A, 5W):
– Remove the number plate light unit using a flat-tipped screwdriver protected by asoft cloth on the catch (A-fig. 54).

– Refit the bulb holder (C-fig. 55) turning clockwise.
– Refit the complete unit (B-fig. 54)
firstly inserting the catches and then pressing in correspondence with the stopper(A-fig. 54).

– Remove the unit (B-fig. 54).

A0B0134m

fig. 54

The additional stop light is built into therear spoiler (fig. 56).
Refer to the Alfa Romeo Authorized Services for its replacement.

A0B0135m

fig. 55

A0B0136m

fig. 56

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

ADDITIONAL STOP LIGHTS(3rd STOP)ALFA 156 GTA SPORTWAGON

NUMBER PLATE LIGHTS

255

ALFA 156 GTA SPORTWAGON

IF AN INTERIOR
LIGHTS GOES OUTTAILGATE LIGHT– Remove the bulb (B-fig. 58) pullingoutwards and releasing it from the side contacts.

To change the bulb (Type C, 10W):– Open the tailgate.

WARNING Before changing a bulb, read
the warnings and precautions given in thechapter “In an emergency“.

– Remove the light (A-fig. 57) leveringwith a flat-tipped screwdriver in the point
shown.

– Insert the new bulb fitting it correctly between the contacts.
– Refit the light inserting it and then pressing until the catch clicks into place.

A0B0139m

256

fig. 57

fig. 58

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0B0140m

System/Component

The specific fuse for Sportwagon versions
is located in the central fuseholder above themain fusebox and access to it is gained removing the protective panel.

Additional current
socket in the boot

WARNING Before changing a fuse or relay, read the warnings and precautions given in the chapter “In an emergency“.

Fuse no.

Amperage

Location

10

20A

fig. 59

ALFA 156 GTA SPORTWAGON

IF A FUSE BLOWS

A0B0141m

257

fig. 59

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONST E C H N I C A L S P E C I F I C AT I O N SIDENTIFICATIONDATA
The identification data should be recorded.
The identification data is carried on labels located in the following positions (fig. 1-2):
1 - Identification label
2 - Body label
3 - Bodywork paint identification label– Saloon versions = fig. 1– Sportwagon versions = fig. 2
4 - Engine label.

BODY LABELENGINE LABELS

The body label carrying the following information is located in the engine bay to one
side of the right-hand shock absorber upper connection:

On the rear left-hand side, gearbox side.

– Type of vehicle: ZAR 932000– Manufacturer’s serial number (chassis
number).
For some versions/markets the marking
is partially covered by a protection. To see
the marking completely, remove the capturning counter-clockwise and raise the protection.

A0B0057m

258 fig. 1

A0B0058m

fig. 2

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

IDENTIFICATION LABEL

On the Saloon versions, the plate is applied in the internal part of the luggage compartment (3-fig. 1), while on the Sportwagon versions it is applied on the righthand internal edge of the tailgate (3fig. 2). The plate carries the following data (fig. 3):
A.

Paint manufacturer

B.

Name of colour

C.

Colour code.

D.

Colour code for touching up and respraying.

This is located in the engine bay on thefront crossmember (fig. 4).
It carries the following identification data:
A. Space for details of national homologation
B. Space for punching the consecutive
chassis number
C. Space available for maximum
weights authorised by various national laws

A0B0059m

fig. 3

E. Space for smoke index (Diesel versions only)
F. Space for punching manufacturer’s
name.

A0B0076m

259

fig. 4

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

D. Space for version and any supplementary indications to those specified

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSBODYWORK PAINT
IDENTIFICATION LABELTECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSENGINE AND BODY VERSION CODESEngine code

Body code(Saloon versions)(Sportwagon versions)

3.2 V6 24V

932A000

932AXB00 46 C

932BXB00 47 C

3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

932A000

932AXB01 48 C

932BXB01 49 C

260

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Code type
Cycle
Number and position of cylinders

3.2 V6 24V

3.2 V6 24V
Selespeed

932A000

932A000

Otto

Otto

6 in 60° V

6 in 60° V

Piston bore and strokemm

93 x 78

93 x 78

Total displacement

cm3

3179

3179

kW
HP
rpm

184
250
6200

184
250
6200

Nm
kgm
rpm

300
30.6
4800

300
30.6
4800

NGK R PFR6BNGK R PFR6B

Unleaded
petrol95 RON

Unleaded
petrol95 RONTECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSENGINE

Maximum horsepower (EEC):at
Maximum torque (EEC):
at
Spark plugs

Fuel

261

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSFUEL SUPPLY

SupplyFiring order

3.2 V6 24V

3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

Electronic injection Multi Point

Electronic injection Multi Point

1-4-2-5-3-6

1-4-2-5-3-6

WARNING
Alterations or repairs to the supply system not carried out correctly or without taking account of
the technical specifications of the system, may cause abnormal functioning with the risk of fire.

TRANSMISSION
3.2 V6 24V

3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

Gearbox

Six forward gears plus reverse allsynchronised

Six forward gears
and reverse withelectronic control

ClutchDry single disk withhydraulic control

Dry single disk withelectrohydraulic control

Drive

Front

Front

262

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Clean, intact spark plugs are determinantwith regard to engine efficiency and for reducing the emission of pollutants.

If examined by an expert eye, the appearance of a spark plug is a sound clue
for locating a fault, even if not involving theignition system. Therefore if you are experiencing any engine problems, it is important to have the spark plugs checked by Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

Spark plugs should be replaced at the intervals
specified in the Scheduled
maintenance programme. Only use
spark plugs of the specified type:if the thermal capacity is inadequate or if the envisaged life is notguaranteed inconveniences may ensue.

BRAKES
Service brakes:– front– rear

3.2 V6 24V

3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

Disk
self-ventilated
Disk

Disk
self-ventilated
Disk

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSSPARK PLUGS

Wheel anti-look system (ABS) with electronic braking distribution.
Servo-brake. Electronic control with brake pad wear sensors. Gaskets of ecological type.
Controlled by hand lever operating rear brakes.

Parking brake

STEERING
3.2 V6 24V
TypeTurning radius (between pavements)

3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

Rack and pinion.
Hydraulic power steering with liquid reservoir in engine compartment
11.6 m

11.6 m263

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSWHEELS
3.2 V6 24V

3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

Rims

7.5J x 17“ (alloy)

7.5J x 17“ (alloy)

Tyres

225/45 ZR17“ 91Y(unchainable tyres)

225/45 ZR17“ 91Y(unchainable tyres)

215/45 R17” 87W (*)
215/45 ZR17” 87W (*)

215/45 R17” 87W (*)
215/45 ZR17” 87W (*)

225/45 ZR17“ 91Q (M+S)(unchainable tyres)

225/45 ZR17“ 91Q (M+S)(unchainable tyres)Standard fittings

Optional fittings
Tyres
Winter tyres(*) WARNING Chainable tyres; see paragraph "Snow chains" in section "Correct use of the car".

264

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Tyres225/45 ZR17“ (•)
front
rear

Tyres
215/45 R17“ (*)
front
rear

Tyres
215/45 ZR17“ (*)
front
rear

Reduced load (2 occupants)

bar

2.5

2.3

2.4

2.4

2.4

2.4

Full load

bar

2.8

2.6

2.6

2.6

2.6

2.6

(•) Unchainable tyres.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSTYRES INFLATION PRESSURES COLD(*) WARNING Chainable tyres; see paragraph "Snow chains" in section "Correct use of the car".
With the tyre hot the inflating pressure should be +0.3 bar compared with the specified rating. Recheck pressure value with cold tyres.
With winter tyres the inflation pressure should be +0.2 bar compared with the specified rating.

265

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSRIMS AND TYRES
Alloy rims.
Radial Tubeless tyres.
The Log book shows all the homologatedtyres.
WARNING In the event of any discrepancies between this Handbook and the vehicle Log Book, only the latter should be considered.

CORRECT TYREREADING (fig. 5)
Below are the instructions necessary toknow the meaning of the code stamped on
the tyre.
The code may be like one of the examples
given below.

While the specified dimensions remain thesame, for driving safety, the vehicle must be
fitted with tyres of the same brand and typeon all wheels.
WARNING Do not use inner tubes with
Tubeless tyres.

Example:225/45 ZR17 91Y

225 = Nominal width (S, distancein mm between sides).
45= Percentage height/width ratio(H/S).

ZR= Radial tyre with speed above
240 kph.

17= Rim diameter in inches (Ø).

91

= Load index (capacity).

Y= Maximum speed index.

266

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Load index (capacity)
60 = 250 kg
61 = 257 kg
62 = 265 kg
63 = 272 kg
64 = 280 kg
65 = 290 kg
66 = 300 kg
67 = 307 kg
68 = 315 kg
69 = 325 kg
70 = 335 kg
71 = 345 kg
72 = 355 kg
73 = 365 kg
74 = 375 kg
75 = 387 kg
76 = 400 kg
77 = 412 kg
78 = 425 kg
79 = 437 kg
80 = 450 kg
81 = 462 kg
82 = 475 kg
83 = 487 kg

84 = 500 kg
85 = 515 kg
86 = 530 kg
87 = 545 kg
88 = 560 kg
89 = 580 kg
90 = 600 kg
91 = 615 kg
92 = 630 kg
93 = 650 kg
94 = 670 kg
95 = 690 kg
96 = 710 kg
97 = 730 kg
98 = 750 kg
99 = 775 kg
100 = 800 kg
101 = 825 kg
102 = 850 kg
103 = 875 kg
104 = 900 kg
105 = 925 kg
106 = 950 kg

CORRECT RIM READING

7.5 = rim width in inches (1)Q = up to 160 km/h

Below are the instructions necessary toknow the meaning of the code stamped on
the rim, as shown in (fig. 5).

J= rim drop centre outline (side projection where the tyre bead rests(2)17= rim nominal diameter in inches(corresponds to diameter of thetyre to be mounted) (3 = Ø)R= up to 170 km/h

S

= up to 180 km/h

T= up to 190 km/h

U = up to 200 km/h

Example:H = up to 210 km/h

7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 43

H2 = “hump“ shape and number (relief
on the circumference holding theTubeless tyre bead on the rim)

V = up to 240 km/h

ET 43 = camber angle (distance between disk/rim line and wheel
rim centre line)

W = up to 270 km/h
Y

= up to 300 km/h

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Maximum speed index

Maximum speed index
for snow tyres
Q M + S = up to 160 km/h
T M + S = up to 190 km/h
H M + S = up to 210 km/h

A0B0395m

267

fig. 5

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSWHEEL GEOMETRY
3.2 V6 24V - 3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

Front wheels:– camber– 0° 24´ ± 20´– caster4° 6´ ± 30´– toe-in–2 ± 0.6 mm (*) (–18 ± 5)

– camber– 1° 12´ ± 20´– toe-in

2.5 ± 1 mm (*) (23´ ± 9)

Rear wheels:(*) The toe-in value, primes to mm conversion, is always calculated taking into account a 15" rim regardless of rims actually used. Should it be impossible
to set the 15" rim at the test bench, refer to primes value. The toe-in value, tolerance included, shall always be evenly distributed between the two wheels.

268

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

SALOON
VERSIONS

3.2 V6 24V

3.2 V6 24V
Selespeed

Maximum speed

250 km/h

250 km/h

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h

6.3 s

6.3 s

Kilometer with standing start

25.9 s25.9 s

SPORTWAGONVERSIONS

3.2 V6 24V

3.2 V6 24V
Selespeed

Maximum speed

250 km/h

250 km/h

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h

6.3 s

6.3 s

Kilometer with standing start

25.9 s25.9 sTECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSPERFORMANCE

269

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

A0B0342m

DIMENSIONS

fig. 6
Dimensions are expressed in mm
Height indicated is for an unladen car

270

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

A0B0341m

fig. 7
Dimensions are expressed in mm
Height indicated is for an unladen car

271

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSLUGGAGE COMPARTMENT - SALOON VERSIONS
3.2 V6 24V

3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

378

378

3.2 V6 24V

3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

Kerb weight1410 kg1410 kg

Max. permitted weight (*)

1910 kg1910 kg

Payload including
driver (**)

500 kg

500 kgCapacity (dm3)

WEIGHTS - SALOON VERSIONS(*) Weight not to be exceeded. The Driver must arrange the goods in the luggage compartment and/or load surface so that they comply with these limits.
(**) If special equipment is fitted (sunroof etc.) the unladen weight increases, thus reducing the payload as specified in the maximum weight allowed.

272

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3.2 V6 24V

3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

Capacity (dm3)

360

360

Capacity withrear seat backfolded (dm3)

1180

1180

3.2 V6 24V

3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

Kerb weight

1460 kg

1460 kg

Max. permitted weight (*)

1955 kg1955 kg

Payload including
driver (**)

495 kg

495 kg

WEIGHTS - SPORTWAGON VERSIONSTECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSLUGGAGE COMPARTMENT - SPORTWAGON VERSIONS(*) Weight not to be exceeded. The Driver must arrange the goods in the luggage compartment and/or load surface so that they comply with these limits.
(**) If special equipment is fitted (sunroof etc.) the unladen weight increases, thus reducing the payload as specified in the maximum weight allowed.

273

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSREFILLING
3.2 V6 24V

3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

Specified fuels
Recommended products

Fuel tank:– including a reserve oflitreslitres63
7

63
7Unleaded Premium petrol
with no less than 95 R.O.N

Engine coolingsystemlitres9.2

9.2

Mixture of distilled water and
PARAFLU 11 (blue) at 50% or
PARAFLU UP (red) at 50%

Oil sump and filter

litres

5.90

5.90

SELENIA RACING

Mechanical gearbox/
differential

litres2.0

2.0

TUTELA CAR MATRYX

Selespeed gearbox
actuation hydraulic systemlitres–0.6

TUTELA CAR CS SPEED

Windscreen washer and rearscreen
washer fluid reservoir:
litres– with headlamp washer
litres

2.5
5.3

2.5
5.3

Mixture of water and liquid
TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC 35

274

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

USABLE PRODUCTS AND THEIR SPECIFICATIONS

Use

Recommended fluids
and lubricantsApplications

SELENIA RACING

SAE 10W-60 synthetic lubricant

A0B0019m

Lubricants for
petrol engines

Quality features of fluids and lubricants
for correct vehicle operation

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSFLUIDS AND LUBRICANTSWARNING Do not top up with oil with different specifications that the oil already in the engine.

275

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Use

Quality features of fluids and lubricants
for correct vehicle operation

Recommended fluids
and lubricantsApplications

SAE 75W-85 synthetic oil.
Meets API GL 4 and MIL-L-2105 D LEV specifications

TUTELA CAR
MATRYX

Mechanical gearbox anddifferential

ATF DEXRON III type oil

TUTELA CAR
CS SPEED

Selespeed transmission
electrically-operated
electrohydraulic drive

ATF DEXRON II D LEV type oil

TUTELA GI/A

Hydraulic power steering

Lithium-soap-based grease with molybdenum bisulphate.
Consistency NLGI 2

TUTELA MRM 2

C.V. joints

Brake fluid

F.M.V.S.S. n° 116 DOT 4, ISO 4925, SAE J1704,
CUNA NC 956-01 synthetic fluid

TUTELA CAR TOP 4
for Alfa Romeo

Hydraulic brake andclutch control

Protective agent for radiators

Protective with antifreeze action, blue color, based on inhibited monoethylene
glycol, CUNA NC 956-16

PARAFLU 11 (*)

Lubricants andgreases
for transmissions

orProtective with antifreeze action, red colour, based on inhibited monoethylen
glycol, with O.A.T.-based organic formula, that passes CUNA NC 956-16,
ASTM D 3306 specifications
Windscreen/
rearscreen/headlamp
washer fluid

Mixture of spirits and surface-active agents CUNA NC 956-11(*) IMPORTANT Do not add or mix with fluids with specifications other than the specified ones.

276

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

PARAFLU UP (*)
TUTELA
PROFESSIONAL
SC 35

Cooling ducts
Percentage:
50% down to –35°C

To be used neator diluted

The fuel consumption values shown in thefollowing tables were established during homologation tests prescribed in specific European Directives.

– an extraurban cycle: this includes
frequent accelerating in all gears, simulating normal extraurban use of the vehicle;
the speed varies between 0 and 120 kph;

The test conditions adopted include the following:– combined consumption: this is calculated by considering a route consisting ofabout 37% urban cycle and 63% extraurban cycle.

– an urban cycle: this includes cold
starting followed by simulation of a mixed
urban route;

WARNING The type of route, traffic conditions, weather conditions,driving style, conditions of the vehicle, trim level/equipment/ accessories, vehicle load, presence of roof
rack, use of the climate control system, other items that negatively affect the aerodynamics of the vehicle or wind resistance lead to different fuel consumption levels thanthose measured by the above-mentioned procedures (see “Reducing
running costs and environment pollution“ in the chapter “Correct useof the car“).

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSFUEL CONSUMPTION

277

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSCONSUMPTION ACCORDING TO EEC 1999/100/ (litres x 100 km)
SALOON VERSIONS

3.2 V6 24V

3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

Urban

18.1

18.1

Extraurban

8.6

8.6

Combined

12.1

12.1

3.2 V6 24V

3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

Urban

18.4

18.4

Extraurban

8.8

8.8

Combined

12.3

12.3

SPORTWAGON VERSIONS

278

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

The CO2 emission levels shown in the following tables are measured on a mixed cycle.
CO2 EMISSIONS ACCORDING TO DIRECTIVE 1999/100/EC (g/km)
SALOON VERSIONS
Value (g/km)

SPORTWAGON VERSIONS
Value (g/km)

3.2 V6 24V

3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

287

287

3.2 V6 24V

3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

293

293

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

CO2 EMISSIONS

279

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSRADIO FREQUENCY REMOTE CONTROL:MINISTERIAL HOMOLOGATIONSInternational code

CountryA

Austria

B

Belgium

CH

Switzerland

D

Germany

DK

Denmark

E

Spain

EST

EstoniaF

FranceGB

Great Britain

GR

Greece

I

Italy

IRL

Eire

IS

IslandL

Luxembourg

N

NorwayNL

Netherlands

P

PortugalS

SwedenSF

Finland

Certification number

280

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

281

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

ALPHABETICAL INDEXALPHABETICAL INDEXABD system .............................. 155

Battery .................................... 226

ABS .......................................... 152- advice for prolonging life .......... 229

Air bags, front and side

- charging .......................... 208-228- deactivating passenger’s
air bag ..................................

42- front air bags .........................

40- replacement ........................... 229- general cautions .....................

45- passenger side front air bag .....

43- starting with an auxiliary
battery .................................. 208- side air bags
(side bag - window bag) ..........

Body (cleaning) ................... 234-235
43

Air filter- body versions.......................... 260
Body marking ............................. 258- check and replacement ......

225- Air recirculation ................

116

Air vents .............................. 100-101

Bonnet ...................................... 148
Boot- securing the load .................... 147- tailgate closing ....................... 147- warnings for carrying luggage ... 148
Boot extension- partial ............................. 249-250- total ..................................... 250
Boot light- changing bulb ........................ 199- courtesy light ......................... 139
Brake and clutch fluid- checking level and topping up ... 223

Alfa 156 GTA Sportwagon ... 238- capacity ....................

272-273- handbrake ............................. 125

Alfa Romeo CODE system .............

6- lighting ................................. 147- specifications ......................... 263

Antievaporation system ................ 161- opening from inside ................ 146

Bulbs (replacement) .................... 183

Ashtray- opening with remotecontrol .............................. 8-146

Car lifting- front ..................................... 140- rear ...................................... 141282- checking the charge ................ 228- passenger compartment
separation net (upper) ............ 248

ASR system ................................ 154- passenger compartment
separation net (lower) ............. 249

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine- with arm hoist......................... 211- with workshop hoist ................ 211

Dashboard ................................

Cleaning and maintenance33- car exterior ...................... 234-235

Catalyst ..................................... 161- car interior ............................. 237

Changing battery of key
with remote control ..................

- engine compartment ............... 236

Carrying children safely ................

10- leather seats .......................... 237

Changing bulbs ........................... 183- plastic parts ........................... 237- general instructions ................. 184- windows ............................... 236- types of bulbs .................. 184-185
Charging the battery .................... 228
Checking levels ........................... 219- brake and clutch fluid .............. 223- engine coolant ....................... 222- engine oil .............................. 220- power steering oil ................... 222- Selespeed gearbox oil ............. 221- windscreen/
headlamp washing fluid ........... 224
Child safety device (doors) ...........

19

Child’s seats(compliance with regulations) ....

36

Children (carrying safely) .............

33

Cigar lighter ............................... 140

Climate control system .................

Climate control system,
automatic two-zone .................. 101
Clock .........................................

56

Dashboard lighting dimming ......... 123
Demisting-defrosting- rearscreen and door mirrors ......

- checking fluid level
and topping up ....................... 223

24- windscreen and side windows.... 119
Dimensions .......................... 270-271
Direction indicators- changing front bulbs .........

189- changing rear bulbs ................. 194- changing side bulbs ................. 192- switching on ..........................

ClutchDoor mirrors (adjustment) ........

48
23

Doors

CO2 emissions ............................ 279
CODE card ..................................
7- central locking ........................

18- opening/closing from inside......

18

Control buttons ...........................

61- opening/closing from outside ...

17

Controls ..................................... 122- remote locking/unlocking ........

8

Courtesy light ............................. 139

EBD .........................................

93

Cruise control(constant speed adjustment) ......

Economy and environmentfriendly driving ......................... 170

Correct use of the car ........... 162

52

Current socket ............................ 246

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

99

55

ALPHABETICAL INDEXCar maintenance ................... 214

Electronic alarm system ................

11

283

ALPHABETICAL INDEXEngine oil- ministerial homologation ..........

15- shutting off the system ............

15- checking level and topping up.... 220- switching off ..........................

13- consumption .......................... 220- switching on ..........................

12

Environment (safeguarding) ......... 160- volumetric protection ...............

14

EOBD system .............................. 156

Electronic control units ................. 230
Emergency starting ............... 164-175
Engine- identification codes ................. 260- inertial fuel cut-off switch ......... 123

First-aid kit ................................ 213
Fix&Go (quick tyre repair kit) ........ 178
Flashing high beams ....................

48- marking ................................ 258

Fluids and lubricants(specifications) ........................ 275- opening the bonnet ................. 148

Front foglights- level gauge and reserve
warning light ..........................

57- refuelling ............................... 274
Fuel flap .................................... 159- emergency opening .......... 160-252
Fuel level gauge andreserve warning light ................

57

Fuel reserve ............................... 274
Fuel supply ................................ 262
Fuel tank (capacity) .................... 274
Fuses- specifications ......................... 261- changing bulbs ....................... 190- list of protected devices ........... 204- switching off .......................... 163- switching on .......................... 122- fuses in fusebox on dashboard .. 201- warming ............................... 163

Front roof light ........................... 138

Engine codes .............................. 260- changing bulbs ....................... 196- fuses in fusebox onbattery pole ........................... 201

Engine compartment

Front seats- bonnet .................................. 148- adjustments ...........................

20- cleaning ................................ 236- electric heating .......................

21- rear pockets ...........................

21

Engine coolant- checking level and topping up ... 222- temperature gauge andwarning light ..........................

57- fuel cap ................................. 159

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine- fuses in the glovebox .............. 202- generalities ............................ 200

Getting to know your car ...

6

Glovebox ................................... 137

Fuel- consumption .................... 277-278284- fuses in engine compartment .... 203

Glovebox light- changing bulbs ....................... 198

Identification data ...................... 258

Lambda sensors ......................... 161

Grab handles ........................ 138-252

Ignition device ............................

Low beam headlamps

Handbrake lever ........................ 125

In an emergency .................... 175- changing bulbs ................. 187-190

Hazard lights

In the event of an accident ........... 212- switching on ..........................

- switching on .......................... 122

16- if anybody is injured ................ 212

47

Luggage compartment cover .......... 247
Luggage retainer net ............. 246-247

Headlamp aiming device .............. 150

Infocenter display ........................

59

Headlamp washer ................... 51-234

Inside rear-view mirror(adjustment) ...........................

23

Instrument cluster .......................

56- additional operations................ 217- annual inspection plan ............. 217- compensation for tilt ............... 150- lighting adjustment ................. 123- scheduled maintenance ........... 214- front foglight adjustment .......... 151

Interior (cleaning) ....................... 237- gas discharge headlamps ......... 151

Interior lighting- scheduled maintenanceprogramme ............................ 215

Headlamps ................................. 150- beam aiming ......................... 150

Maintenance

Mechanical gearbox

Headlight corrector ...................... 124- boot lighting .......................... 147

Headrests- dashboard lighting (dimming) .. 123- rear ......................................

22

Heating- glove compartment lighting ...... 137- automatic two-zone
climate control ....................... 101- switching on ..........................

47

Internal fittings ..................... 137-252

Oddment recesses ..................... 141

Isofix (child’s seat).......................

37

Key ..........................................

6- colour label ............................ 259- replacing remote control battery ..

10Parking ...................................... 164

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Number plate lights- changing bulbs ....................... 195

High beam headlamps- changing bulbs ................. 188-192- lever ..................................... 126

58- infocenter display lighting ........

ALPHABETICAL INDEX- rear lights .............................. 139

Paintwork (maintenance) ........... 235
285

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

Performance ............................... 269- headrests ..............................

22

Safe driving .............................. 164

Pollen filter ................................ 226- ski compartment ....................

22

Safeguarding the environment ...... 160

Pockets on doors ......................... 142

Rearscreen heating .................. 24-120

Power steering

Rearscreen washer ...................... 241

Scheduled maintenanceprogramme ............................. 215- checking fluid level andtopping up ............................. 222- spray jet ................................ 242

33- rear centre lap belt ..................

28- front and rear belt heightadjustment ............................

29

Reducing running costs
and environment pollution ......... 168- general instructions for use .......

31- maintenance ..........................

32

Refuelling .................................. 274- pretensioners .........................

30

Remote control

28
26

24

- front .....................................

24- blade replacement .................. 241- rear ......................................

25- operation ............................... 241

Pretensioners ..............................

30

Radio transmitters andSeat belts- carrying children safely ............

Power windows ..........................

Protecting devices that
reduce emissions ...................... 170

Rearscreen wiper- additional remote controls ........

12- rear abdominal centre belt
housing ..................................

- alarm system .........................

11- use of seat belts .....................

- changing battery ....................

10

Securing the load ........................ 147- changing bulbs ....................... 193- door opening-closing ...............

7

Selespeed gearbox ...................... 127- switching on .......................... 123- ministerial homologation ..... 15-280

cellular telephones .................... 143
Rain sensor ................................

50

Rear fog guards

Rear roof lights ..................... 139-140- changing bulbs ................. 197-198
Rear seat286- blade .................................... 241- centre armrest ........................

21

Rev counter ................................
Reversing light- changing front bulbs ......... 189-191- changing rear bulbs ................. 194- changing bulbs ....................... 193- switching on ..........................

47

Rubber hoses .............................. 232

Ski compartment ........................

22

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

57

Side lights

Steering lock ..............................

17

Towing the car ............................ 209

Sound system ...................... 157-252

Steering wheel adjustment ...........

22

Towing trailers ............................ 171

Sound system

Steering wheel levers ..................

47

Transmission ............................... 262
Tyres- presetting system .................... 157

Stop lights (changing bulbs) ......... 194

Spark plugs ................................ 263

Stopping the engine .................... 163- correct reading ....................... 266

Speedometer ..............................

Sun roof- inflation pressure .............. 231-265

56

Spray jets
- windscreen/rearscreen/
headlamp .............................. 234
Starting the engine....................... 162- ignition switch.........................

16- emergency manoeuvre ............ 145- snow chains ........................... 172- opening-closing ....................... 144- types of tyres and rims ............ 264- raising at rear ......................... 144- winter tyres ........................... 172

Sun visors .................................. 142

Useful accessories ..................... 174

Symbols ....................................

6- starting by inertia ................... 177- starting procedure ................... 162

Tailgate .................................... 145

Vehicle data plates .................... 259- starting with an auxiliary
battery .................................. 176- opening from inside ................ 146

Vehicle exterior and under-bodywarranty ................................. 235- opening from outside ..............

Vehicle identification .................... 258- switching off the engine .......... 163- opening with remotecontrol ..............................

- warming the engine ................ 163

8

Vehicle inactivity ......................... 173
8-146

Starting with an auxiliary battery.... 176

Technical specifications ......... 258

Steering system

Telephone (provision) .................. 142- specifications ......................... 263- steering wheel adjustments ......

23

Third stop light- changing bulbs ....................... 195

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

ALPHABETICAL INDEXSnow chains ............................... 172- using again ............................ 174
Ventilation- automatic two-zone
climate control ....................... 101
Volumetric protection ...................

14

287

ALPHABETICAL INDEXWindows- cleaning ................................ 236
Windscreen washer- checking fluid level
and topping up ....................... 224- “intelligent washing” function ...

50- operation ...............................

49- spray jets .............................. 234
Windscreen wiper- blade replacement .................. 233- “intelligent washing” function .. 50- operation ...............................

49- spray jet ................................ 234
Winter- snow chains ........................... 172- winter tyres ..................... 172-264

288

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

NOTES

289

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

290

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

291

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

292

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

293

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

294

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine®

®

Always ask your mechanic for

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Your car is factory filled with Selenia Racing

The Selenia range,
satisfies the most sophisticated international specifications.
Highly advanced and tested technical characteristics
allow Selenia to be a lubricant able to guarantee themaximum protection and performance of your engine.

SELENIA RACING

SELENIA RACING assicura inoltre:

Iis a lubricant which is particularly suited forcompetition use of T urismo vehicles this lubricant
is the result of the Selenia racing team's lenghtly
experience on some of the most importantinternational circuits.
It guarantees maximum protection athigh temperatures

I maximum use of power output;
I constant pressure within lubrication system
in all kinds of application;
I optimum viscosity at the highest of temperatures.
Can be used in aspirated turbocharged
or multivalve petrol engines of any capacity.

The Selenia range includes Selenia 20K, Selenia 20K Alfa Romeo, Selenia Performer 5W-30 e 5W-40,
Selenia Turbo Diesel, Selenia WR, Selenia Digitech.
For further information on Selenia products visit the web site www.flselenia.com.

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

This supplement describes the main characteristics of the right hand drive version.
For any topic not specifically dealt with in this supplement, refer to the main Owner’s manual which should be thoroughly read to ensurethat the vehicle is used correctly and that the maximum performance is obtained under conditions of safety.

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSIONRIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSION

297

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSIONDASHBOARD

A0B00463m

fig. 1
1. Side air outlets - 2. Defrosting/demisting vents for side windows - 3. Upper side vents - 4. Passanger’s Air bag - 5. Sound system 6. Engine coolant temperature gauge - 7. Clock - 8. Centre air vents - 9. Infocenter display - 10. Fuel level gauge - 11. Cruise control
lever (where fitted) - 12. Outside lights control lever - 13. Speedometer. - mileage recorder - 14. Check panel - 15. Rev counter 16. Windscreen wiper control lever - 17. Bonnet opening lever - 18. Radio controls on the steering wheel (where applicable) - 19. Ignition switch - 20. Steering wheel lock/release lever - 21. Driver’s Air bag and horns - 22. Controls unit: instrument panel lighting adjustment and healamp diming - 23. Controls for heating, ventilation and climate control - 24. Ashtray and cigar lighter - 25. Hazard lights- 26. Glove box.

298

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSIONINSTRUMENT PANELA0B0403m

fig. 2
A. Speedometer - B. Mileage recorder and trip meter display - C. Check panel - D. Rev counter - E. Engine coolant temperature gauge F. Clock - G. Fuel level gauge - H. Services warning lights

299

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSIONMILEAGE RECORDER
WITH DOUBLE METER DISPLAY(TOTAL AND TRIP)
The display shows:– the mileage on the first line (6 figures)– the trip meter (4 figures).
To reset the trip meter, keep the button(A) pressed for a few seconds.

DASHBOARD LIGHTING
ADJUSTMENT (fig. 3)

HEADLIGHT CORRECTOR (fig. 3)

When the outside lights are on, the dashboard lighting is adjusted pressing button(B).
Each press of the button (B) cyclically selects one of the three lighting levels provided: low-medium-high.

WARNING The trip meter reading is notstored if the battery is disconnected.

The control (C) on the plate at the sideof the steering column can be moved to four
positions corresponding to various vehicleloads given below.
Both headlights should be adjusted to compensate for vehicle loading.
Position 0: 1 or 2 people occupying front
seats, full fuel tank, on-board equipment
present.
Position 1: 5 people on-board.
Position 2: 5 people on-board, luggage
compartment full (50 kg approximately).
Position 3: Driver and 300 kg in luggage
compartment.

A0B0418m

300

fig. 3

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Electric adjusting seat inclination

FRONT SEATS (fig. 4)This can be done pressing the button (B)until the desired position is reached.

WARNING
Adjustments may be madesolely with the car stationary.

Adjusting the height of thedriver’s seat
To raise the seat, pull the lever (C) taking it upwards, then continue operating thelever (up and down) until reaching the required height.
To lower the seat, push the lever (C)downwards, then operate the lever (up anddown) until reaching the height required.

A0B0459m

Moving the seat backwards
or forwards

WARNING Adjustment must only be carried out when seated in the driver’s seat.

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSIONSEATS

Lumbar adjustmentof the driver’s seat(for versions/markets where applicable)

Lift lever (A) and push the seat backwards
or forwards. Once you have let go of thelever, check that the seat is firmly lockedin the runners by trying to move it back andforth.

Adjustment is done by turning the knob(D) until reaching the most comfortable position.

If the seat is not locked properly, in thecase of collision it might move unexpectedly with clearly dangerous consequences.

301

fig. 4

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSIONOPENING THE BOOT (fig. 6)

CONTROLS

To open the boot pull the lever (A) at theside of the driver’s seat.
AUTOMATIC FUEL CUT-OFF
SWITCH (fig. 5)This is an automatic safety switch under thepassanger’s seat which is triggered in theevent of crash to interrupt the flow of fuel.

WARNING
Do not operate the boot release lever with the car on
the move.

WARNING
If a smell of fuel is noted
following an accident, or
the fuel system is leaking, to avoid
the risk of fire do not reset theswitch.
If no leaks are found the vehicle can berestarted. Press button (A) to activate thefuel supply system.
A0B0327m

302

fig. 5

A0B0421m

fig. 6

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

OPENING THE FUEL FLAP
(fig. 6)
The fuel flap is released from inside the car
raising the front part of the lever (B).

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSIONHEATING AND CLIMATE CONTROL

A0A0361m

fig. 7
1. Central vents for demisting/defrosting the windscreen - 2. Upper adjustable side vents - 3. Vents for demisting/defrosting the side windows - 4. Movable side outlets - 5. Upper adjustable vent - 6. Central movable and adjustable vents - 7. Front seat floor vents - 8. Rear seatfloor vents - 9. Rear seat adjustable and movable outlets.

303

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSION

ADJUSTING THE UPPER VENT
(fig. 8)ADJUSTING THE SIDE VENTS(fig. 10)ADJUSTABLE AND MOVABLE
OUTLETSThe vent is fitted with an opening/closing
control.

At the ends of the dashboard there are adjustable vents (A) for ventilating the passenger compartment and fixed vents (B) for
demisting the side windows.

Fig. 11: Front seats (at the ends of thedashboard)closed.
•) == Completely
Completely open.

Fig. 12: Rear seats (on the console between the seats)

To adjust the air flow of the vents turn thering (C).

ADJUSTING THE CENTRE
VENTS (fig. 9)
Each vent has a lever through which it ispossible to direct the flow of air towards the
persons horizontally.

closed.
•) == Completely
Completely open.

Using the opening/closing control it is possible to adjust the air flow rate of the vents.
closed.
•( == Completely
Completely open.

A0B0458m

304

fig. 8

A0B0340m

fig. 9fig. 10

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0B0297m

The air flow is directed by turning the outlets using the fins.

AIR BAGThe key-operated switch (fig. 13) has
two positions:

DEACTIVATING THE
PASSENGER’S AIR BAG

1) Passenger’s Air bag activated: (ONposition P) warning light on instrument
cluster off; it is absolutely prohibited tocarry a child on the front seat.

Should it be absolutely necessary to carry a child on the front seat, the passenger’s
Air bag on the vehicle can be deactivated.
A0B0299m

Deactivation takes place using the car
ignition key to operate the special switch
on the left hand side of the dashboard(fig. 13). Access to the switch is gained
only with the door open.

2) Passenger’s Air bag deactivated:(OFF position F) warning light on instrument cluster on; it is possible to carry a child protected by special restraint
systems on the front seat.
The warning light L on the cluster
stays on permanently until the passenger’s Air bag is reactivated.

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSION

To adjust the air flow rate use the fins (A)pressing to open/close.

When the door is open, the key can beinserted and removed in both positions.

fig. 11
A0B0289m

fig. 12

A0B0310m

305

fig. 13

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSIONWARNINGSERIOUS DANGER!

SELESPEED GEARBOX

with a car fitted with an Air bag on
the passenger’s side, do not placea child’s seat on the front seat facing backwards. In the case of need,always deactivate the passenger’s
Air bag (if fitted) when a child’sseat is placed on the front seat.
Even if it is not compulsory by law,for better protection of adults, you
are recommended to activate theAir bag immediately as soon as
child transport is no longer necessary.

Below you will find the more significant
particulars of right-hand drive versions.
WARNING As the differences are only
formal, due to the specular position of thecontrols, as far as functioning is concerned,
please refer to the descriptions given for lefthand drive versions.

Fig. 15 shows the steering wheel fittedwith two buttons on the spokes for shifting
the gear engaged up/down.
Fig. 16 shows the position of button A
for selecting the automatic CITY mode.

Fig. 14 shows the gearshift lever withthe lay-out of the movements needed to select the different gears.

A0B0411m

fig. 15
A0B0464m

306

fig. 14

fig. 16

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0B0465m

FUSES IN THE MAIN FUSEBOX(fig. 17) or (fig. 18 forversions/markets whereapplicable)
The fuses for the main devices are housed
in a control unit under the dashboard, to theright of the steering column.

A0B0416m

fig. 17

A0B0397m

WARNING In case of doubt, contact an
Alfa Romeo Authorized Service.

307

fig. 18

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

To gain access to them, remove the panel (A-fig. 17 or A-fig. 18) releasing thetabs (B-fig. 17 or B-fig. 18) in the direction of the arrow below and unlock thescrew (C-fig. 17 or C-fig. 18).

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSION

IN THE EVENT OF A
BURNT FUSE OR RELAYRIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSION

The graphic symbols which distinguish themain electric component corresponding toeach fuse are given on a label (fig. 19)
on the inner wall of the panel (A-fig. 17
or A-fig. 18).
Some spare fuses are housed at the rightof the control unit; you are advised to replenish the stock of spare fuses when they
are used.

FUSES ABOVE THE MAINFUSEBOX
The protection fuses for some services aregrouped in three containers (fig. 20)
above the main fusebox to which access isgained removing the panel (A-fig. 17 or
A-fig. 18).

A0B0417m

A0B0185m

308

fig. 19

fig. 20

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

NOTES

309

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

310

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

311

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

TYRES INFLATION PRESSURE COLD (bar)Tyres 225/45 ZR17“ (•)
front
rear

Tyres 215/45 ZR17“ (*)
front
rear

Tyres 215/45 R17“ (*)
front
rear

Reduced load (2 occupants)

bar

2.5

2.3

2.4

2.4

2.4

2.4

Full load

bar

2.8

2.6

2.6

2.6

2.6

2.6

(•) Unchainable tyres.
(*) WARNING Chainable tyres; see paragraph "Snow chains" in section "Correct use of the car".
Increase the specified pressure by +0.3 bar if the tyre is warm.
With the tyre hot the inflating pressure should be +0.3 bar compared with the specified rating. Recheck pressure value with cold tyres.
With winter tyres the inflation pressure should be +0.2 bar compared with the specified rating.

ENGINE OIL REPLACEMENT (litres)
3.2 V6 24V

3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

5.90

5.90

3.2 V6 24V

3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

Fuel tank capacity

63

63

Reserve7

7

Oil sump and filter
Do not discard used oil in the environment.

REFUELLING (litres)

Only use unleaded petrol with over 95 R.O.N.

AFTER SALESASSISTENZA TECNICA - INGEGNERIA ASSISTENZIALE
Viale Alfa Romeo 20020 Arese (MI) - Italia
Fiat Auto S.p.A.
Publication no. 60431344 - 5th Edition - 10/2004
Printed by Satiz - Turin (Italy)
SERVICEAll rights reserved. Reproduction, even in part is prohibited without written permission
from Fiat Auto S.p.A.
Coordinamento Editoriale Satiz - Torino

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

AlfaWiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine